postgresql/doc/src/sgml/catalogs.sgml

Ignoring revisions in .git-blame-ignore-revs. Click here to bypass and see the normal blame view.

9728 lines
328 KiB
Plaintext
Raw Normal View History

2010-09-20 22:08:53 +02:00
<!-- doc/src/sgml/catalogs.sgml -->
<!--
Documentation of the system catalogs, directed toward PostgreSQL developers
-->
<chapter id="catalogs">
<title>System Catalogs</title>
<para>
The system catalogs are the place where a relational database
management system stores schema metadata, such as information about
tables and columns, and internal bookkeeping information.
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname>'s system catalogs are regular
tables. You can drop and recreate the tables, add columns, insert
and update values, and severely mess up your system that way.
Normally, one should not change the system catalogs by hand, there
are normally SQL commands to do that. (For example, <command>CREATE
DATABASE</command> inserts a row into the
<structname>pg_database</structname> catalog &mdash; and actually
creates the database on disk.) There are some exceptions for
particularly esoteric operations, but many of those have been made
available as SQL commands over time, and so the need for direct manipulation
of the system catalogs is ever decreasing.
</para>
<sect1 id="catalogs-overview">
<title>Overview</title>
<para>
<xref linkend="catalog-table"/> lists the system catalogs.
More detailed documentation of each catalog follows below.
</para>
<para>
Most system catalogs are copied from the template database during
database creation and are thereafter database-specific. A few
catalogs are physically shared across all databases in a cluster;
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
these are noted in the descriptions of the individual catalogs.
</para>
<table id="catalog-table">
<title>System Catalogs</title>
<tgroup cols="2">
<thead>
<row>
<entry>Catalog Name</entry>
<entry>Purpose</entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-aggregate"><structname>pg_aggregate</structname></link></entry>
<entry>aggregate functions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-am"><structname>pg_am</structname></link></entry>
<entry>relation access methods</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-amop"><structname>pg_amop</structname></link></entry>
<entry>access method operators</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-amproc"><structname>pg_amproc</structname></link></entry>
<entry>access method support functions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-attrdef"><structname>pg_attrdef</structname></link></entry>
<entry>column default values</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link></entry>
<entry>table columns (<quote>attributes</quote>)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link></entry>
<entry>authorization identifiers (roles)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-auth-members"><structname>pg_auth_members</structname></link></entry>
<entry>authorization identifier membership relationships</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-cast"><structname>pg_cast</structname></link></entry>
<entry>casts (data type conversions)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link></entry>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
<entry>tables, indexes, sequences, views (<quote>relations</quote>)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-collation"><structname>pg_collation</structname></link></entry>
<entry>collations (locale information)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-constraint"><structname>pg_constraint</structname></link></entry>
<entry>check constraints, unique constraints, primary key constraints, foreign key constraints</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-conversion"><structname>pg_conversion</structname></link></entry>
<entry>encoding conversion information</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-database"><structname>pg_database</structname></link></entry>
<entry>databases within this database cluster</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-db-role-setting"><structname>pg_db_role_setting</structname></link></entry>
<entry>per-role and per-database settings</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-default-acl"><structname>pg_default_acl</structname></link></entry>
<entry>default privileges for object types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-depend"><structname>pg_depend</structname></link></entry>
<entry>dependencies between database objects</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-description"><structname>pg_description</structname></link></entry>
<entry>descriptions or comments on database objects</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-enum"><structname>pg_enum</structname></link></entry>
<entry>enum label and value definitions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-event-trigger"><structname>pg_event_trigger</structname></link></entry>
<entry>event triggers</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-extension"><structname>pg_extension</structname></link></entry>
<entry>installed extensions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-foreign-data-wrapper"><structname>pg_foreign_data_wrapper</structname></link></entry>
<entry>foreign-data wrapper definitions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-foreign-server"><structname>pg_foreign_server</structname></link></entry>
<entry>foreign server definitions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-foreign-table"><structname>pg_foreign_table</structname></link></entry>
<entry>additional foreign table information</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-index"><structname>pg_index</structname></link></entry>
<entry>additional index information</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-inherits"><structname>pg_inherits</structname></link></entry>
<entry>table inheritance hierarchy</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-init-privs"><structname>pg_init_privs</structname></link></entry>
<entry>object initial privileges</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-language"><structname>pg_language</structname></link></entry>
<entry>languages for writing functions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-largeobject"><structname>pg_largeobject</structname></link></entry>
<entry>data pages for large objects</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-largeobject-metadata"><structname>pg_largeobject_metadata</structname></link></entry>
<entry>metadata for large objects</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link></entry>
<entry>schemas</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-opclass"><structname>pg_opclass</structname></link></entry>
<entry>access method operator classes</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link></entry>
<entry>operators</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-opfamily"><structname>pg_opfamily</structname></link></entry>
<entry>access method operator families</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-parameter-acl"><structname>pg_parameter_acl</structname></link></entry>
<entry>configuration parameters for which privileges have been granted</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-partitioned-table"><structname>pg_partitioned_table</structname></link></entry>
<entry>information about partition key of tables</entry>
</row>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-policy"><structname>pg_policy</structname></link></entry>
<entry>row-security policies</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link></entry>
<entry>functions and procedures</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-publication"><structname>pg_publication</structname></link></entry>
<entry>publications for logical replication</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-publication-namespace"><structname>pg_publication_namespace</structname></link></entry>
<entry>schema to publication mapping</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-publication-rel"><structname>pg_publication_rel</structname></link></entry>
<entry>relation to publication mapping</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-range"><structname>pg_range</structname></link></entry>
<entry>information about range types</entry>
</row>
Introduce replication progress tracking infrastructure. When implementing a replication solution ontop of logical decoding, two related problems exist: * How to safely keep track of replication progress * How to change replication behavior, based on the origin of a row; e.g. to avoid loops in bi-directional replication setups The solution to these problems, as implemented here, consist out of three parts: 1) 'replication origins', which identify nodes in a replication setup. 2) 'replication progress tracking', which remembers, for each replication origin, how far replay has progressed in a efficient and crash safe manner. 3) The ability to filter out changes performed on the behest of a replication origin during logical decoding; this allows complex replication topologies. E.g. by filtering all replayed changes out. Most of this could also be implemented in "userspace", e.g. by inserting additional rows contain origin information, but that ends up being much less efficient and more complicated. We don't want to require various replication solutions to reimplement logic for this independently. The infrastructure is intended to be generic enough to be reusable. This infrastructure also replaces the 'nodeid' infrastructure of commit timestamps. It is intended to provide all the former capabilities, except that there's only 2^16 different origins; but now they integrate with logical decoding. Additionally more functionality is accessible via SQL. Since the commit timestamp infrastructure has also been introduced in 9.5 (commit 73c986add) changing the API is not a problem. For now the number of origins for which the replication progress can be tracked simultaneously is determined by the max_replication_slots GUC. That GUC is not a perfect match to configure this, but there doesn't seem to be sufficient reason to introduce a separate new one. Bumps both catversion and wal page magic. Author: Andres Freund, with contributions from Petr Jelinek and Craig Ringer Reviewed-By: Heikki Linnakangas, Petr Jelinek, Robert Haas, Steve Singer Discussion: 20150216002155.GI15326@awork2.anarazel.de, 20140923182422.GA15776@alap3.anarazel.de, 20131114172632.GE7522@alap2.anarazel.de
2015-04-29 19:30:53 +02:00
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-replication-origin"><structname>pg_replication_origin</structname></link></entry>
<entry>registered replication origins</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-rewrite"><structname>pg_rewrite</structname></link></entry>
<entry>query rewrite rules</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-seclabel"><structname>pg_seclabel</structname></link></entry>
<entry>security labels on database objects</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-sequence"><structname>pg_sequence</structname></link></entry>
<entry>information about sequences</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-shdepend"><structname>pg_shdepend</structname></link></entry>
<entry>dependencies on shared objects</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-shdescription"><structname>pg_shdescription</structname></link></entry>
<entry>comments on shared objects</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-shseclabel"><structname>pg_shseclabel</structname></link></entry>
<entry>security labels on shared database objects</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-statistic"><structname>pg_statistic</structname></link></entry>
<entry>planner statistics</entry>
</row>
Implement multivariate n-distinct coefficients Add support for explicitly declared statistic objects (CREATE STATISTICS), allowing collection of statistics on more complex combinations that individual table columns. Companion commands DROP STATISTICS and ALTER STATISTICS ... OWNER TO / SET SCHEMA / RENAME are added too. All this DDL has been designed so that more statistic types can be added later on, such as multivariate most-common-values and multivariate histograms between columns of a single table, leaving room for permitting columns on multiple tables, too, as well as expressions. This commit only adds support for collection of n-distinct coefficient on user-specified sets of columns in a single table. This is useful to estimate number of distinct groups in GROUP BY and DISTINCT clauses; estimation errors there can cause over-allocation of memory in hashed aggregates, for instance, so it's a worthwhile problem to solve. A new special pseudo-type pg_ndistinct is used. (num-distinct estimation was deemed sufficiently useful by itself that this is worthwhile even if no further statistic types are added immediately; so much so that another version of essentially the same functionality was submitted by Kyotaro Horiguchi: https://postgr.es/m/20150828.173334.114731693.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp though this commit does not use that code.) Author: Tomas Vondra. Some code rework by Álvaro. Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, David Rowley, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Jeff Janes, Ideriha Takeshi Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/543AFA15.4080608@fuzzy.cz https://postgr.es/m/20170320190220.ixlaueanxegqd5gr@alvherre.pgsql
2017-03-24 18:06:10 +01:00
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-statistic-ext"><structname>pg_statistic_ext</structname></link></entry>
<entry>extended planner statistics (definition)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-statistic-ext-data"><structname>pg_statistic_ext_data</structname></link></entry>
<entry>extended planner statistics (built statistics)</entry>
Implement multivariate n-distinct coefficients Add support for explicitly declared statistic objects (CREATE STATISTICS), allowing collection of statistics on more complex combinations that individual table columns. Companion commands DROP STATISTICS and ALTER STATISTICS ... OWNER TO / SET SCHEMA / RENAME are added too. All this DDL has been designed so that more statistic types can be added later on, such as multivariate most-common-values and multivariate histograms between columns of a single table, leaving room for permitting columns on multiple tables, too, as well as expressions. This commit only adds support for collection of n-distinct coefficient on user-specified sets of columns in a single table. This is useful to estimate number of distinct groups in GROUP BY and DISTINCT clauses; estimation errors there can cause over-allocation of memory in hashed aggregates, for instance, so it's a worthwhile problem to solve. A new special pseudo-type pg_ndistinct is used. (num-distinct estimation was deemed sufficiently useful by itself that this is worthwhile even if no further statistic types are added immediately; so much so that another version of essentially the same functionality was submitted by Kyotaro Horiguchi: https://postgr.es/m/20150828.173334.114731693.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp though this commit does not use that code.) Author: Tomas Vondra. Some code rework by Álvaro. Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, David Rowley, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Jeff Janes, Ideriha Takeshi Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/543AFA15.4080608@fuzzy.cz https://postgr.es/m/20170320190220.ixlaueanxegqd5gr@alvherre.pgsql
2017-03-24 18:06:10 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-subscription"><structname>pg_subscription</structname></link></entry>
<entry>logical replication subscriptions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-subscription-rel"><structname>pg_subscription_rel</structname></link></entry>
<entry>relation state for subscriptions</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-tablespace"><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></link></entry>
<entry>tablespaces within this database cluster</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-transform"><structname>pg_transform</structname></link></entry>
<entry>transforms (data type to procedural language conversions)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-trigger"><structname>pg_trigger</structname></link></entry>
<entry>triggers</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-config"><structname>pg_ts_config</structname></link></entry>
<entry>text search configurations</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-config-map"><structname>pg_ts_config_map</structname></link></entry>
<entry>text search configurations' token mappings</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-dict"><structname>pg_ts_dict</structname></link></entry>
<entry>text search dictionaries</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-parser"><structname>pg_ts_parser</structname></link></entry>
<entry>text search parsers</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-template"><structname>pg_ts_template</structname></link></entry>
<entry>text search templates</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link></entry>
<entry>data types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-user-mapping"><structname>pg_user_mapping</structname></link></entry>
<entry>mappings of users to foreign servers</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-aggregate">
<title><structname>pg_aggregate</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-aggregate">
<primary>pg_aggregate</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_aggregate</structname> stores information about
aggregate functions. An aggregate function is a function that
operates on a set of values (typically one column from each row
that matches a query condition) and returns a single value computed
from all these values. Typical aggregate functions are
<function>sum</function>, <function>count</function>, and
<function>max</function>. Each entry in
<structname>pg_aggregate</structname> is an extension of an entry
in <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.
The <structname>pg_proc</structname> entry carries the aggregate's name,
input and output data types, and other information that is similar to
ordinary functions.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_aggregate</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggfnoid</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
<structname>pg_proc</structname> OID of the aggregate function
</para></entry>
</row>
Support ordered-set (WITHIN GROUP) aggregates. This patch introduces generic support for ordered-set and hypothetical-set aggregate functions, as well as implementations of the instances defined in SQL:2008 (percentile_cont(), percentile_disc(), rank(), dense_rank(), percent_rank(), cume_dist()). We also added mode() though it is not in the spec, as well as versions of percentile_cont() and percentile_disc() that can compute multiple percentile values in one pass over the data. Unlike the original submission, this patch puts full control of the sorting process in the hands of the aggregate's support functions. To allow the support functions to find out how they're supposed to sort, a new API function AggGetAggref() is added to nodeAgg.c. This allows retrieval of the aggregate call's Aggref node, which may have other uses beyond the immediate need. There is also support for ordered-set aggregates to install cleanup callback functions, so that they can be sure that infrastructure such as tuplesort objects gets cleaned up. In passing, make some fixes in the recently-added support for variadic aggregates, and make some editorial adjustments in the recent FILTER additions for aggregates. Also, simplify use of IsBinaryCoercible() by allowing it to succeed whenever the target type is ANY or ANYELEMENT. It was inconsistent that it dealt with other polymorphic target types but not these. Atri Sharma and Andrew Gierth; reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Vik Fearing, and rather heavily editorialized upon by Tom Lane
2013-12-23 22:11:35 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggkind</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Aggregate kind:
<literal>n</literal> for <quote>normal</quote> aggregates,
<literal>o</literal> for <quote>ordered-set</quote> aggregates, or
<literal>h</literal> for <quote>hypothetical-set</quote> aggregates
</para></entry>
Support ordered-set (WITHIN GROUP) aggregates. This patch introduces generic support for ordered-set and hypothetical-set aggregate functions, as well as implementations of the instances defined in SQL:2008 (percentile_cont(), percentile_disc(), rank(), dense_rank(), percent_rank(), cume_dist()). We also added mode() though it is not in the spec, as well as versions of percentile_cont() and percentile_disc() that can compute multiple percentile values in one pass over the data. Unlike the original submission, this patch puts full control of the sorting process in the hands of the aggregate's support functions. To allow the support functions to find out how they're supposed to sort, a new API function AggGetAggref() is added to nodeAgg.c. This allows retrieval of the aggregate call's Aggref node, which may have other uses beyond the immediate need. There is also support for ordered-set aggregates to install cleanup callback functions, so that they can be sure that infrastructure such as tuplesort objects gets cleaned up. In passing, make some fixes in the recently-added support for variadic aggregates, and make some editorial adjustments in the recent FILTER additions for aggregates. Also, simplify use of IsBinaryCoercible() by allowing it to succeed whenever the target type is ANY or ANYELEMENT. It was inconsistent that it dealt with other polymorphic target types but not these. Atri Sharma and Andrew Gierth; reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Vik Fearing, and rather heavily editorialized upon by Tom Lane
2013-12-23 22:11:35 +01:00
</row>
Support ordered-set (WITHIN GROUP) aggregates. This patch introduces generic support for ordered-set and hypothetical-set aggregate functions, as well as implementations of the instances defined in SQL:2008 (percentile_cont(), percentile_disc(), rank(), dense_rank(), percent_rank(), cume_dist()). We also added mode() though it is not in the spec, as well as versions of percentile_cont() and percentile_disc() that can compute multiple percentile values in one pass over the data. Unlike the original submission, this patch puts full control of the sorting process in the hands of the aggregate's support functions. To allow the support functions to find out how they're supposed to sort, a new API function AggGetAggref() is added to nodeAgg.c. This allows retrieval of the aggregate call's Aggref node, which may have other uses beyond the immediate need. There is also support for ordered-set aggregates to install cleanup callback functions, so that they can be sure that infrastructure such as tuplesort objects gets cleaned up. In passing, make some fixes in the recently-added support for variadic aggregates, and make some editorial adjustments in the recent FILTER additions for aggregates. Also, simplify use of IsBinaryCoercible() by allowing it to succeed whenever the target type is ANY or ANYELEMENT. It was inconsistent that it dealt with other polymorphic target types but not these. Atri Sharma and Andrew Gierth; reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Vik Fearing, and rather heavily editorialized upon by Tom Lane
2013-12-23 22:11:35 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggnumdirectargs</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of direct (non-aggregated) arguments of an ordered-set or
Support ordered-set (WITHIN GROUP) aggregates. This patch introduces generic support for ordered-set and hypothetical-set aggregate functions, as well as implementations of the instances defined in SQL:2008 (percentile_cont(), percentile_disc(), rank(), dense_rank(), percent_rank(), cume_dist()). We also added mode() though it is not in the spec, as well as versions of percentile_cont() and percentile_disc() that can compute multiple percentile values in one pass over the data. Unlike the original submission, this patch puts full control of the sorting process in the hands of the aggregate's support functions. To allow the support functions to find out how they're supposed to sort, a new API function AggGetAggref() is added to nodeAgg.c. This allows retrieval of the aggregate call's Aggref node, which may have other uses beyond the immediate need. There is also support for ordered-set aggregates to install cleanup callback functions, so that they can be sure that infrastructure such as tuplesort objects gets cleaned up. In passing, make some fixes in the recently-added support for variadic aggregates, and make some editorial adjustments in the recent FILTER additions for aggregates. Also, simplify use of IsBinaryCoercible() by allowing it to succeed whenever the target type is ANY or ANYELEMENT. It was inconsistent that it dealt with other polymorphic target types but not these. Atri Sharma and Andrew Gierth; reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Vik Fearing, and rather heavily editorialized upon by Tom Lane
2013-12-23 22:11:35 +01:00
hypothetical-set aggregate, counting a variadic array as one argument.
If equal to <structfield>pronargs</structfield>, the aggregate must be variadic
Support ordered-set (WITHIN GROUP) aggregates. This patch introduces generic support for ordered-set and hypothetical-set aggregate functions, as well as implementations of the instances defined in SQL:2008 (percentile_cont(), percentile_disc(), rank(), dense_rank(), percent_rank(), cume_dist()). We also added mode() though it is not in the spec, as well as versions of percentile_cont() and percentile_disc() that can compute multiple percentile values in one pass over the data. Unlike the original submission, this patch puts full control of the sorting process in the hands of the aggregate's support functions. To allow the support functions to find out how they're supposed to sort, a new API function AggGetAggref() is added to nodeAgg.c. This allows retrieval of the aggregate call's Aggref node, which may have other uses beyond the immediate need. There is also support for ordered-set aggregates to install cleanup callback functions, so that they can be sure that infrastructure such as tuplesort objects gets cleaned up. In passing, make some fixes in the recently-added support for variadic aggregates, and make some editorial adjustments in the recent FILTER additions for aggregates. Also, simplify use of IsBinaryCoercible() by allowing it to succeed whenever the target type is ANY or ANYELEMENT. It was inconsistent that it dealt with other polymorphic target types but not these. Atri Sharma and Andrew Gierth; reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Vik Fearing, and rather heavily editorialized upon by Tom Lane
2013-12-23 22:11:35 +01:00
and the variadic array describes the aggregated arguments as well as
the final direct arguments.
Always zero for normal aggregates.
</para></entry>
Support ordered-set (WITHIN GROUP) aggregates. This patch introduces generic support for ordered-set and hypothetical-set aggregate functions, as well as implementations of the instances defined in SQL:2008 (percentile_cont(), percentile_disc(), rank(), dense_rank(), percent_rank(), cume_dist()). We also added mode() though it is not in the spec, as well as versions of percentile_cont() and percentile_disc() that can compute multiple percentile values in one pass over the data. Unlike the original submission, this patch puts full control of the sorting process in the hands of the aggregate's support functions. To allow the support functions to find out how they're supposed to sort, a new API function AggGetAggref() is added to nodeAgg.c. This allows retrieval of the aggregate call's Aggref node, which may have other uses beyond the immediate need. There is also support for ordered-set aggregates to install cleanup callback functions, so that they can be sure that infrastructure such as tuplesort objects gets cleaned up. In passing, make some fixes in the recently-added support for variadic aggregates, and make some editorial adjustments in the recent FILTER additions for aggregates. Also, simplify use of IsBinaryCoercible() by allowing it to succeed whenever the target type is ANY or ANYELEMENT. It was inconsistent that it dealt with other polymorphic target types but not these. Atri Sharma and Andrew Gierth; reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Vik Fearing, and rather heavily editorialized upon by Tom Lane
2013-12-23 22:11:35 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggtransfn</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Transition function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggfinalfn</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Final function (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggcombinefn</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Combine function (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggserialfn</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Serialization function (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggdeserialfn</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Deserialization function (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggmtransfn</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Forward transition function for moving-aggregate mode (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggminvtransfn</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Inverse transition function for moving-aggregate mode (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggmfinalfn</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Final function for moving-aggregate mode (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
Allow polymorphic aggregates to have non-polymorphic state data types. Before 9.4, such an aggregate couldn't be declared, because its final function would have to have polymorphic result type but no polymorphic argument, which CREATE FUNCTION would quite properly reject. The ordered-set-aggregate patch found a workaround: allow the final function to be declared as accepting additional dummy arguments that have types matching the aggregate's regular input arguments. However, we failed to notice that this problem applies just as much to regular aggregates, despite the fact that we had a built-in regular aggregate array_agg() that was known to be undeclarable in SQL because its final function had an illegal signature. So what we should have done, and what this patch does, is to decouple the extra-dummy-arguments behavior from ordered-set aggregates and make it generally available for all aggregate declarations. We have to put this into 9.4 rather than waiting till later because it slightly alters the rules for declaring ordered-set aggregates. The patch turned out a bit bigger than I'd hoped because it proved necessary to record the extra-arguments option in a new pg_aggregate column. I'd thought we could just look at the final function's pronargs at runtime, but that didn't work well for variadic final functions. It's probably just as well though, because it simplifies life for pg_dump to record the option explicitly. While at it, fix array_agg() to have a valid final-function signature, and add an opr_sanity test to notice future deviations from polymorphic consistency. I also marked the percentile_cont() aggregates as not needing extra arguments, since they don't.
2014-04-24 01:17:31 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggfinalextra</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True to pass extra dummy arguments to <structfield>aggfinalfn</structfield>
</para></entry>
Allow polymorphic aggregates to have non-polymorphic state data types. Before 9.4, such an aggregate couldn't be declared, because its final function would have to have polymorphic result type but no polymorphic argument, which CREATE FUNCTION would quite properly reject. The ordered-set-aggregate patch found a workaround: allow the final function to be declared as accepting additional dummy arguments that have types matching the aggregate's regular input arguments. However, we failed to notice that this problem applies just as much to regular aggregates, despite the fact that we had a built-in regular aggregate array_agg() that was known to be undeclarable in SQL because its final function had an illegal signature. So what we should have done, and what this patch does, is to decouple the extra-dummy-arguments behavior from ordered-set aggregates and make it generally available for all aggregate declarations. We have to put this into 9.4 rather than waiting till later because it slightly alters the rules for declaring ordered-set aggregates. The patch turned out a bit bigger than I'd hoped because it proved necessary to record the extra-arguments option in a new pg_aggregate column. I'd thought we could just look at the final function's pronargs at runtime, but that didn't work well for variadic final functions. It's probably just as well though, because it simplifies life for pg_dump to record the option explicitly. While at it, fix array_agg() to have a valid final-function signature, and add an opr_sanity test to notice future deviations from polymorphic consistency. I also marked the percentile_cont() aggregates as not needing extra arguments, since they don't.
2014-04-24 01:17:31 +02:00
</row>
Allow polymorphic aggregates to have non-polymorphic state data types. Before 9.4, such an aggregate couldn't be declared, because its final function would have to have polymorphic result type but no polymorphic argument, which CREATE FUNCTION would quite properly reject. The ordered-set-aggregate patch found a workaround: allow the final function to be declared as accepting additional dummy arguments that have types matching the aggregate's regular input arguments. However, we failed to notice that this problem applies just as much to regular aggregates, despite the fact that we had a built-in regular aggregate array_agg() that was known to be undeclarable in SQL because its final function had an illegal signature. So what we should have done, and what this patch does, is to decouple the extra-dummy-arguments behavior from ordered-set aggregates and make it generally available for all aggregate declarations. We have to put this into 9.4 rather than waiting till later because it slightly alters the rules for declaring ordered-set aggregates. The patch turned out a bit bigger than I'd hoped because it proved necessary to record the extra-arguments option in a new pg_aggregate column. I'd thought we could just look at the final function's pronargs at runtime, but that didn't work well for variadic final functions. It's probably just as well though, because it simplifies life for pg_dump to record the option explicitly. While at it, fix array_agg() to have a valid final-function signature, and add an opr_sanity test to notice future deviations from polymorphic consistency. I also marked the percentile_cont() aggregates as not needing extra arguments, since they don't.
2014-04-24 01:17:31 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggmfinalextra</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True to pass extra dummy arguments to <structfield>aggmfinalfn</structfield>
</para></entry>
Allow polymorphic aggregates to have non-polymorphic state data types. Before 9.4, such an aggregate couldn't be declared, because its final function would have to have polymorphic result type but no polymorphic argument, which CREATE FUNCTION would quite properly reject. The ordered-set-aggregate patch found a workaround: allow the final function to be declared as accepting additional dummy arguments that have types matching the aggregate's regular input arguments. However, we failed to notice that this problem applies just as much to regular aggregates, despite the fact that we had a built-in regular aggregate array_agg() that was known to be undeclarable in SQL because its final function had an illegal signature. So what we should have done, and what this patch does, is to decouple the extra-dummy-arguments behavior from ordered-set aggregates and make it generally available for all aggregate declarations. We have to put this into 9.4 rather than waiting till later because it slightly alters the rules for declaring ordered-set aggregates. The patch turned out a bit bigger than I'd hoped because it proved necessary to record the extra-arguments option in a new pg_aggregate column. I'd thought we could just look at the final function's pronargs at runtime, but that didn't work well for variadic final functions. It's probably just as well though, because it simplifies life for pg_dump to record the option explicitly. While at it, fix array_agg() to have a valid final-function signature, and add an opr_sanity test to notice future deviations from polymorphic consistency. I also marked the percentile_cont() aggregates as not needing extra arguments, since they don't.
2014-04-24 01:17:31 +02:00
</row>
Explicitly track whether aggregate final functions modify transition state. Up to now, there's been hard-wired assumptions that normal aggregates' final functions never modify their transition states, while ordered-set aggregates' final functions always do. This has always been a bit limiting, and in particular it's getting in the way of improving the built-in ordered-set aggregates to allow merging of transition states. Therefore, let's introduce catalog and CREATE AGGREGATE infrastructure that lets the finalfn's behavior be declared explicitly. There are now three possibilities for the finalfn behavior: it's purely read-only, it trashes the transition state irrecoverably, or it changes the state in such a way that no more transfn calls are possible but the state can still be passed to other, compatible finalfns. There are no examples of this third case today, but we'll shortly make the built-in OSAs act like that. This change allows user-defined aggregates to explicitly disclaim support for use as window functions, and/or to prevent transition state merging, if their implementations cannot handle that. While it was previously possible to handle the window case with a run-time error check, there was not any way to prevent transition state merging, which in retrospect is something commit 804163bc2 should have provided for. But better late than never. In passing, split out pg_aggregate.c's extern function declarations into a new header file pg_aggregate_fn.h, similarly to what we've done for some other catalog headers, so that pg_aggregate.h itself can be safe for frontend files to include. This lets pg_dump use the symbolic names for relevant constants. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4834.1507849699@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-10-14 21:21:39 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggfinalmodify</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Whether <structfield>aggfinalfn</structfield> modifies the
Explicitly track whether aggregate final functions modify transition state. Up to now, there's been hard-wired assumptions that normal aggregates' final functions never modify their transition states, while ordered-set aggregates' final functions always do. This has always been a bit limiting, and in particular it's getting in the way of improving the built-in ordered-set aggregates to allow merging of transition states. Therefore, let's introduce catalog and CREATE AGGREGATE infrastructure that lets the finalfn's behavior be declared explicitly. There are now three possibilities for the finalfn behavior: it's purely read-only, it trashes the transition state irrecoverably, or it changes the state in such a way that no more transfn calls are possible but the state can still be passed to other, compatible finalfns. There are no examples of this third case today, but we'll shortly make the built-in OSAs act like that. This change allows user-defined aggregates to explicitly disclaim support for use as window functions, and/or to prevent transition state merging, if their implementations cannot handle that. While it was previously possible to handle the window case with a run-time error check, there was not any way to prevent transition state merging, which in retrospect is something commit 804163bc2 should have provided for. But better late than never. In passing, split out pg_aggregate.c's extern function declarations into a new header file pg_aggregate_fn.h, similarly to what we've done for some other catalog headers, so that pg_aggregate.h itself can be safe for frontend files to include. This lets pg_dump use the symbolic names for relevant constants. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4834.1507849699@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-10-14 21:21:39 +02:00
transition state value:
<literal>r</literal> if it is read-only,
<literal>s</literal> if the <structfield>aggtransfn</structfield>
cannot be applied after the <structfield>aggfinalfn</structfield>, or
<literal>w</literal> if it writes on the value
</para></entry>
Explicitly track whether aggregate final functions modify transition state. Up to now, there's been hard-wired assumptions that normal aggregates' final functions never modify their transition states, while ordered-set aggregates' final functions always do. This has always been a bit limiting, and in particular it's getting in the way of improving the built-in ordered-set aggregates to allow merging of transition states. Therefore, let's introduce catalog and CREATE AGGREGATE infrastructure that lets the finalfn's behavior be declared explicitly. There are now three possibilities for the finalfn behavior: it's purely read-only, it trashes the transition state irrecoverably, or it changes the state in such a way that no more transfn calls are possible but the state can still be passed to other, compatible finalfns. There are no examples of this third case today, but we'll shortly make the built-in OSAs act like that. This change allows user-defined aggregates to explicitly disclaim support for use as window functions, and/or to prevent transition state merging, if their implementations cannot handle that. While it was previously possible to handle the window case with a run-time error check, there was not any way to prevent transition state merging, which in retrospect is something commit 804163bc2 should have provided for. But better late than never. In passing, split out pg_aggregate.c's extern function declarations into a new header file pg_aggregate_fn.h, similarly to what we've done for some other catalog headers, so that pg_aggregate.h itself can be safe for frontend files to include. This lets pg_dump use the symbolic names for relevant constants. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4834.1507849699@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-10-14 21:21:39 +02:00
</row>
Explicitly track whether aggregate final functions modify transition state. Up to now, there's been hard-wired assumptions that normal aggregates' final functions never modify their transition states, while ordered-set aggregates' final functions always do. This has always been a bit limiting, and in particular it's getting in the way of improving the built-in ordered-set aggregates to allow merging of transition states. Therefore, let's introduce catalog and CREATE AGGREGATE infrastructure that lets the finalfn's behavior be declared explicitly. There are now three possibilities for the finalfn behavior: it's purely read-only, it trashes the transition state irrecoverably, or it changes the state in such a way that no more transfn calls are possible but the state can still be passed to other, compatible finalfns. There are no examples of this third case today, but we'll shortly make the built-in OSAs act like that. This change allows user-defined aggregates to explicitly disclaim support for use as window functions, and/or to prevent transition state merging, if their implementations cannot handle that. While it was previously possible to handle the window case with a run-time error check, there was not any way to prevent transition state merging, which in retrospect is something commit 804163bc2 should have provided for. But better late than never. In passing, split out pg_aggregate.c's extern function declarations into a new header file pg_aggregate_fn.h, similarly to what we've done for some other catalog headers, so that pg_aggregate.h itself can be safe for frontend files to include. This lets pg_dump use the symbolic names for relevant constants. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4834.1507849699@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-10-14 21:21:39 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggmfinalmodify</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Like <structfield>aggfinalmodify</structfield>, but for
Explicitly track whether aggregate final functions modify transition state. Up to now, there's been hard-wired assumptions that normal aggregates' final functions never modify their transition states, while ordered-set aggregates' final functions always do. This has always been a bit limiting, and in particular it's getting in the way of improving the built-in ordered-set aggregates to allow merging of transition states. Therefore, let's introduce catalog and CREATE AGGREGATE infrastructure that lets the finalfn's behavior be declared explicitly. There are now three possibilities for the finalfn behavior: it's purely read-only, it trashes the transition state irrecoverably, or it changes the state in such a way that no more transfn calls are possible but the state can still be passed to other, compatible finalfns. There are no examples of this third case today, but we'll shortly make the built-in OSAs act like that. This change allows user-defined aggregates to explicitly disclaim support for use as window functions, and/or to prevent transition state merging, if their implementations cannot handle that. While it was previously possible to handle the window case with a run-time error check, there was not any way to prevent transition state merging, which in retrospect is something commit 804163bc2 should have provided for. But better late than never. In passing, split out pg_aggregate.c's extern function declarations into a new header file pg_aggregate_fn.h, similarly to what we've done for some other catalog headers, so that pg_aggregate.h itself can be safe for frontend files to include. This lets pg_dump use the symbolic names for relevant constants. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4834.1507849699@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-10-14 21:21:39 +02:00
the <structfield>aggmfinalfn</structfield>
</para></entry>
Explicitly track whether aggregate final functions modify transition state. Up to now, there's been hard-wired assumptions that normal aggregates' final functions never modify their transition states, while ordered-set aggregates' final functions always do. This has always been a bit limiting, and in particular it's getting in the way of improving the built-in ordered-set aggregates to allow merging of transition states. Therefore, let's introduce catalog and CREATE AGGREGATE infrastructure that lets the finalfn's behavior be declared explicitly. There are now three possibilities for the finalfn behavior: it's purely read-only, it trashes the transition state irrecoverably, or it changes the state in such a way that no more transfn calls are possible but the state can still be passed to other, compatible finalfns. There are no examples of this third case today, but we'll shortly make the built-in OSAs act like that. This change allows user-defined aggregates to explicitly disclaim support for use as window functions, and/or to prevent transition state merging, if their implementations cannot handle that. While it was previously possible to handle the window case with a run-time error check, there was not any way to prevent transition state merging, which in retrospect is something commit 804163bc2 should have provided for. But better late than never. In passing, split out pg_aggregate.c's extern function declarations into a new header file pg_aggregate_fn.h, similarly to what we've done for some other catalog headers, so that pg_aggregate.h itself can be safe for frontend files to include. This lets pg_dump use the symbolic names for relevant constants. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4834.1507849699@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-10-14 21:21:39 +02:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggsortop</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Associated sort operator (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggtranstype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Data type of the aggregate function's internal transition (state) data
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggtransspace</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Approximate average size (in bytes) of the transition state
data, or zero to use a default estimate
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggmtranstype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Data type of the aggregate function's internal transition (state)
data for moving-aggregate mode (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggmtransspace</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Approximate average size (in bytes) of the transition state data
for moving-aggregate mode, or zero to use a default estimate
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>agginitval</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The initial value of the transition state. This is a text
field containing the initial value in its external string
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
representation. If this field is null, the transition state
value starts out null.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>aggminitval</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The initial value of the transition state for moving-aggregate mode.
This is a text field containing the initial value in its external
string representation. If this field is null, the transition state
value starts out null.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
New aggregate functions are registered with the <link
linkend="sql-createaggregate"><command>CREATE AGGREGATE</command></link>
command. See <xref linkend="xaggr"/> for more information about
writing aggregate functions and the meaning of the transition
functions, etc.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-am">
<title><structname>pg_am</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-am">
<primary>pg_am</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_am</structname> stores information about
relation access methods. There is one row for each access method supported
by the system.
Currently, only tables and indexes have access methods. The requirements for table
and index access methods are discussed in detail in <xref linkend="tableam"/> and
<xref linkend="indexam"/> respectively.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_am</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the access method
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amhandler</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of a handler function that is responsible for supplying information
about the access method
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amtype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>t</literal> = table (including materialized views),
<literal>i</literal> = index.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<note>
<para>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> 9.6, <structname>pg_am</structname>
contained many additional columns representing properties of index access
methods. That data is now only directly visible at the C code level.
However, <function>pg_index_column_has_property()</function> and related
functions have been added to allow SQL queries to inspect index access
method properties; see <xref linkend="functions-info-catalog-table"/>.
</para>
</note>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-amop">
<title><structname>pg_amop</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-amop">
<primary>pg_amop</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_amop</structname> stores information about
operators associated with access method operator families. There is one
row for each operator that is a member of an operator family. A family
member can be either a <firstterm>search</firstterm> operator or an
<firstterm>ordering</firstterm> operator. An operator
can appear in more than one family, but cannot appear in more than one
search position nor more than one ordering position within a family.
(It is allowed, though unlikely, for an operator to be used for both
search and ordering purposes.)
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_amop</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amopfamily</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-opfamily"><structname>pg_opfamily</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The operator family this entry is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amoplefttype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Left-hand input data type of operator
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amoprighttype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Right-hand input data type of operator
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amopstrategy</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Operator strategy number
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amoppurpose</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Operator purpose, either <literal>s</literal> for search or
<literal>o</literal> for ordering
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amopopr</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the operator
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amopmethod</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-am"><structname>pg_am</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Index access method operator family is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amopsortfamily</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-opfamily"><structname>pg_opfamily</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The B-tree operator family this entry sorts according to, if an
ordering operator; zero if a search operator
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
A <quote>search</quote> operator entry indicates that an index of this operator
family can be searched to find all rows satisfying
<literal>WHERE</literal>
<replaceable>indexed_column</replaceable>
<replaceable>operator</replaceable>
<replaceable>constant</replaceable>.
2014-07-17 04:20:15 +02:00
Obviously, such an operator must return <type>boolean</type>, and its left-hand input
type must match the index's column data type.
</para>
<para>
An <quote>ordering</quote> operator entry indicates that an index of this
operator family can be scanned to return rows in the order represented by
<literal>ORDER BY</literal>
<replaceable>indexed_column</replaceable>
<replaceable>operator</replaceable>
<replaceable>constant</replaceable>.
Such an operator could return any sortable data type, though again
its left-hand input type must match the index's column data type.
The exact semantics of the <literal>ORDER BY</literal> are specified by the
<structfield>amopsortfamily</structfield> column, which must reference
2014-07-17 04:20:15 +02:00
a B-tree operator family for the operator's result type.
</para>
<note>
<para>
At present, it's assumed that the sort order for an ordering operator
2014-07-17 04:20:15 +02:00
is the default for the referenced operator family, i.e., <literal>ASC NULLS
LAST</literal>. This might someday be relaxed by adding additional columns
to specify sort options explicitly.
</para>
</note>
<para>
An entry's <structfield>amopmethod</structfield> must match the
<structfield>opfmethod</structfield> of its containing operator family (including
<structfield>amopmethod</structfield> here is an intentional denormalization of the
catalog structure for performance reasons). Also,
<structfield>amoplefttype</structfield> and <structfield>amoprighttype</structfield> must match
the <structfield>oprleft</structfield> and <structfield>oprright</structfield> fields of the
referenced <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link> entry.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-amproc">
<title><structname>pg_amproc</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-amproc">
<primary>pg_amproc</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_amproc</structname> stores information about
support functions associated with access method operator families. There
is one row for each support function belonging to an operator family.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_amproc</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amprocfamily</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-opfamily"><structname>pg_opfamily</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The operator family this entry is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amproclefttype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Left-hand input data type of associated operator
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amprocrighttype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Right-hand input data type of associated operator
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amprocnum</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Support function number
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>amproc</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the function
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
The usual interpretation of the
<structfield>amproclefttype</structfield> and <structfield>amprocrighttype</structfield> fields
is that they identify the left and right input types of the operator(s)
that a particular support function supports. For some access methods
these match the input data type(s) of the support function itself, for
others not. There is a notion of <quote>default</quote> support functions for
an index, which are those with <structfield>amproclefttype</structfield> and
<structfield>amprocrighttype</structfield> both equal to the index operator class's
<structfield>opcintype</structfield>.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-attrdef">
<title><structname>pg_attrdef</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-attrdef">
<primary>pg_attrdef</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_attrdef</structname> stores column default
values. The main information about columns is stored in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.
Only columns for which a default value has been explicitly set will have
an entry here.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_attrdef</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>adrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The table this column belongs to
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>adnum</structfield> <type>int2</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The number of the column
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>adbin</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
The column default value, in <function>nodeToString()</function>
representation. Use <literal>pg_get_expr(adbin, adrelid)</literal> to
convert it to an SQL expression.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-attribute">
<title><structname>pg_attribute</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-attribute">
<primary>pg_attribute</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_attribute</structname> stores information about
table columns. There will be exactly one
<structname>pg_attribute</structname> row for every column in every
table in the database. (There will also be attribute entries for
indexes, and indeed all objects that have
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
entries.)
</para>
<para>
The term attribute is equivalent to column and is used for
historical reasons.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_attribute</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The table this column belongs to
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
The column name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>atttypid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The data type of this column (zero for a dropped column)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attlen</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
A copy of <literal>pg_type.typlen</literal> of this column's
type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attnum</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
The number of the column. Ordinary columns are numbered from 1
up. System columns, such as <structfield>ctid</structfield>,
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
have (arbitrary) negative numbers.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attcacheoff</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Always -1 in storage, but when loaded into a row descriptor
in memory this might be updated to cache the offset of the attribute
within the row
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>atttypmod</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>atttypmod</structfield> records type-specific data
supplied at table creation time (for example, the maximum
length of a <type>varchar</type> column). It is passed to
type-specific input functions and length coercion functions.
The value will generally be -1 for types that do not need <structfield>atttypmod</structfield>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attndims</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of dimensions, if the column is an array type; otherwise 0.
(Presently, the number of dimensions of an array is not enforced,
so any nonzero value effectively means <quote>it's an array</quote>.)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attbyval</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
A copy of <literal>pg_type.typbyval</literal> of this column's type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attalign</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
A copy of <literal>pg_type.typalign</literal> of this column's type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attstorage</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Normally a copy of <literal>pg_type.typstorage</literal> of this
column's type. For TOAST-able data types, this can be altered
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
after column creation to control storage policy.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attcompression</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
The current compression method of the column. Typically this is
<literal>'\0'</literal> to specify use of the current default setting
(see <xref linkend="guc-default-toast-compression"/>). Otherwise,
<literal>'p'</literal> selects pglz compression, while
<literal>'l'</literal> selects <productname>LZ4</productname>
compression. However, this field is ignored
whenever <structfield>attstorage</structfield> does not allow
compression.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attnotnull</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Catalog not-null constraints We now create contype='n' pg_constraint rows for not-null constraints. We propagate these constraints to other tables during operations such as adding inheritance relationships, creating and attaching partitions and creating tables LIKE other tables. We also spawn not-null constraints for inheritance child tables when their parents have primary keys. These related constraints mostly follow the well-known rules of conislocal and coninhcount that we have for CHECK constraints, with some adaptations: for example, as opposed to CHECK constraints, we don't match not-null ones by name when descending a hierarchy to alter it, instead matching by column name that they apply to. This means we don't require the constraint names to be identical across a hierarchy. For now, we omit them for system catalogs. Maybe this is worth reconsidering. We don't support NOT VALID nor DEFERRABLE clauses either; these can be added as separate features later (this patch is already large and complicated enough.) psql shows these constraints in \d+. pg_dump requires some ad-hoc hacks, particularly when dumping a primary key. We now create one "throwaway" not-null constraint for each column in the PK together with the CREATE TABLE command, and once the PK is created, all those throwaway constraints are removed. This avoids having to check each tuple for nullness when the dump restores the primary key creation. pg_upgrading from an older release requires a somewhat brittle procedure to create a constraint state that matches what would be created if the database were being created fresh in Postgres 17. I have tested all the scenarios I could think of, and it works correctly as far as I can tell, but I could have neglected weird cases. This patch has been very long in the making. The first patch was written by Bernd Helmle in 2010 to add a new pg_constraint.contype value ('n'), which I (Álvaro) then hijacked in 2011 and 2012, until that one was killed by the realization that we ought to use contype='c' instead: manufactured CHECK constraints. However, later SQL standard development, as well as nonobvious emergent properties of that design (mostly, failure to distinguish them from "normal" CHECK constraints as well as the performance implication of having to test the CHECK expression) led us to reconsider this choice, so now the current implementation uses contype='n' again. During Postgres 16 this had already been introduced by commit e056c557aef4, but there were some problems mainly with the pg_upgrade procedure that couldn't be fixed in reasonable time, so it was reverted. In 2016 Vitaly Burovoy also worked on this feature[1] but found no consensus for his proposed approach, which was claimed to be closer to the letter of the standard, requiring an additional pg_attribute column to track the OID of the not-null constraint for that column. [1] https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
2023-08-25 13:31:24 +02:00
This column is marked not-null, either by a not-null constraint
or a primary key.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>atthasdef</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This column has a default expression or generation expression, in which
case there will be a corresponding entry in the
<link linkend="catalog-pg-attrdef"><structname>pg_attrdef</structname></link> catalog that actually defines the
expression. (Check <structfield>attgenerated</structfield> to
determine whether this is a default or a generation expression.)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>atthasmissing</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This column has a value which is used where the column is entirely
missing from the row, as happens when a column is added with a
non-volatile <literal>DEFAULT</literal> value after the row is created.
The actual value used is stored in the
<structfield>attmissingval</structfield> column.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attidentity</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
If a zero byte (<literal>''</literal>), then not an identity column.
Otherwise, <literal>a</literal> = generated
always, <literal>d</literal> = generated by default.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attgenerated</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
If a zero byte (<literal>''</literal>), then not a generated column.
Otherwise, <literal>s</literal> = stored. (Other values might be added
in the future.)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attisdropped</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This column has been dropped and is no longer valid. A dropped
column is still physically present in the table, but is
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
ignored by the parser and so cannot be accessed via SQL.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attislocal</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This column is defined locally in the relation. Note that a column can
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
be locally defined and inherited simultaneously.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attinhcount</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
The number of direct ancestors this column has. A column with a
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
nonzero number of ancestors cannot be dropped nor renamed.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attcollation</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-collation"><structname>pg_collation</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The defined collation of the column, or zero if the column is
not of a collatable data type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attstattarget</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>attstattarget</structfield> controls the level of detail
of statistics accumulated for this column by
<link linkend="sql-analyze"><command>ANALYZE</command></link>.
A zero value indicates that no statistics should be collected.
A null value says to use the system default statistics target.
The exact meaning of positive values is data type-dependent.
For scalar data types, <structfield>attstattarget</structfield>
is both the target number of <quote>most common values</quote>
to collect, and the target number of histogram bins to create.
</para></entry>
</row>
Allow configurable LZ4 TOAST compression. There is now a per-column COMPRESSION option which can be set to pglz (the default, and the only option in up until now) or lz4. Or, if you like, you can set the new default_toast_compression GUC to lz4, and then that will be the default for new table columns for which no value is specified. We don't have lz4 support in the PostgreSQL code, so to use lz4 compression, PostgreSQL must be built --with-lz4. In general, TOAST compression means compression of individual column values, not the whole tuple, and those values can either be compressed inline within the tuple or compressed and then stored externally in the TOAST table, so those properties also apply to this feature. Prior to this commit, a TOAST pointer has two unused bits as part of the va_extsize field, and a compessed datum has two unused bits as part of the va_rawsize field. These bits are unused because the length of a varlena is limited to 1GB; we now use them to indicate the compression type that was used. This means we only have bit space for 2 more built-in compresison types, but we could work around that problem, if necessary, by introducing a new vartag_external value for any further types we end up wanting to add. Hopefully, it won't be too important to offer a wide selection of algorithms here, since each one we add not only takes more coding but also adds a build dependency for every packager. Nevertheless, it seems worth doing at least this much, because LZ4 gets better compression than PGLZ with less CPU usage. It's possible for LZ4-compressed datums to leak into composite type values stored on disk, just as it is for PGLZ. It's also possible for LZ4-compressed attributes to be copied into a different table via SQL commands such as CREATE TABLE AS or INSERT .. SELECT. It would be expensive to force such values to be decompressed, so PostgreSQL has never done so. For the same reasons, we also don't force recompression of already-compressed values even if the target table prefers a different compression method than was used for the source data. These architectural decisions are perhaps arguable but revisiting them is well beyond the scope of what seemed possible to do as part of this project. However, it's relatively cheap to recompress as part of VACUUM FULL or CLUSTER, so this commit adjusts those commands to do so, if the configured compression method of the table happens not to match what was used for some column value stored therein. Dilip Kumar. The original patches on which this work was based were written by Ildus Kurbangaliev, and those were patches were based on even earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, but the design has since changed very substantially, since allow a potentially large number of compression methods that could be added and dropped on a running system proved too problematic given some of the architectural issues mentioned above; the choice of which specific compression method to add first is now different; and a lot of the code has been heavily refactored. More recently, Justin Przyby helped quite a bit with testing and reviewing and this version also includes some code contributions from him. Other design input and review from Tomas Vondra, Álvaro Herrera, Andres Freund, Oleg Bartunov, Alexander Korotkov, and me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20170907194236.4cefce96%40wp.localdomain Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-uUpX3ck%3DK0mLEk-G_kUQY%3DSNOTeqdaNRR9FMdQrHKebw%40mail.gmail.com
2021-03-19 20:10:38 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Column-level access privileges, if any have been granted specifically
on this column
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attoptions</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Attribute-level options, as <quote>keyword=value</quote> strings
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attfdwoptions</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Attribute-level foreign data wrapper options, as <quote>keyword=value</quote> strings
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>attmissingval</structfield> <type>anyarray</type>
</para>
<para>
This column has a one element array containing the value used when the
column is entirely missing from the row, as happens when the column is
added with a non-volatile <literal>DEFAULT</literal> value after the
row is created. The value is only used when
<structfield>atthasmissing</structfield> is true. If there is no value
the column is null.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
<para>
In a dropped column's <structname>pg_attribute</structname> entry,
<structfield>atttypid</structfield> is reset to zero, but
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
<structfield>attlen</structfield> and the other fields copied from
<link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link> are still valid. This arrangement is needed
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
to cope with the situation where the dropped column's data type was
later dropped, and so there is no <structname>pg_type</structname> row anymore.
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
<structfield>attlen</structfield> and the other fields can be used
to interpret the contents of a row of the table.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-authid">
<title><structname>pg_authid</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-authid">
<primary>pg_authid</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_authid</structname> contains information about
database authorization identifiers (roles). A role subsumes the concepts
of <quote>users</quote> and <quote>groups</quote>. A user is essentially just a
role with the <structfield>rolcanlogin</structfield> flag set. Any role (with or
without <structfield>rolcanlogin</structfield>) can have other roles as members; see
<link linkend="catalog-pg-auth-members"><structname>pg_auth_members</structname></link>.
</para>
<para>
Since this catalog contains passwords, it must not be publicly readable.
<link linkend="view-pg-roles"><structname>pg_roles</structname></link>
is a publicly readable view on
<structname>pg_authid</structname> that blanks out the password field.
</para>
<para>
<xref linkend="user-manag"/> contains detailed information about user and
privilege management.
</para>
<para>
Because user identities are cluster-wide,
<structname>pg_authid</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_authid</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_authid</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Role name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolsuper</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Role has superuser privileges
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolinherit</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Role automatically inherits privileges of roles it is a
member of
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolcreaterole</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Role can create more roles
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolcreatedb</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Role can create databases
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolcanlogin</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Role can log in. That is, this role can be given as the initial
session authorization identifier.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolreplication</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Role is a replication role. A replication role can initiate replication
connections and create and drop replication slots.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolbypassrls</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
2021-04-21 08:14:43 +02:00
Role bypasses every row-level security policy, see
<xref linkend="ddl-rowsecurity"/> for more information.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolconnlimit</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
For roles that can log in, this sets maximum number of concurrent
connections this role can make. -1 means no limit.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolpassword</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Support SCRAM-SHA-256 authentication (RFC 5802 and 7677). This introduces a new generic SASL authentication method, similar to the GSS and SSPI methods. The server first tells the client which SASL authentication mechanism to use, and then the mechanism-specific SASL messages are exchanged in AuthenticationSASLcontinue and PasswordMessage messages. Only SCRAM-SHA-256 is supported at the moment, but this allows adding more SASL mechanisms in the future, without changing the overall protocol. Support for channel binding, aka SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS is left for later. The SASLPrep algorithm, for pre-processing the password, is not yet implemented. That could cause trouble, if you use a password with non-ASCII characters, and a client library that does implement SASLprep. That will hopefully be added later. Authorization identities, as specified in the SCRAM-SHA-256 specification, are ignored. SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION provides more or less the same functionality, anyway. If a user doesn't exist, perform a "mock" authentication, by constructing an authentic-looking challenge on the fly. The challenge is derived from a new system-wide random value, "mock authentication nonce", which is created at initdb, and stored in the control file. We go through these motions, in order to not give away the information on whether the user exists, to unauthenticated users. Bumps PG_CONTROL_VERSION, because of the new field in control file. Patch by Michael Paquier and Heikki Linnakangas, reviewed at different stages by Robert Haas, Stephen Frost, David Steele, Aleksander Alekseev, and many others. Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqRbR3GmFYdedCAhzukfKrgBLTLtMvENOmPrVWREsZkF8g%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqSMXU35g%3DW9X74HVeQp0uvgJxvYOuA4A-A3M%2B0wfEBv-w%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/55192AFE.6080106@iki.fi
2017-03-07 13:25:40 +01:00
Password (possibly encrypted); null if none. The format depends
on the form of encryption used.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rolvaliduntil</structfield> <type>timestamptz</type>
</para>
<para>
Password expiry time (only used for password authentication);
null if no expiration
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
Support SCRAM-SHA-256 authentication (RFC 5802 and 7677). This introduces a new generic SASL authentication method, similar to the GSS and SSPI methods. The server first tells the client which SASL authentication mechanism to use, and then the mechanism-specific SASL messages are exchanged in AuthenticationSASLcontinue and PasswordMessage messages. Only SCRAM-SHA-256 is supported at the moment, but this allows adding more SASL mechanisms in the future, without changing the overall protocol. Support for channel binding, aka SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS is left for later. The SASLPrep algorithm, for pre-processing the password, is not yet implemented. That could cause trouble, if you use a password with non-ASCII characters, and a client library that does implement SASLprep. That will hopefully be added later. Authorization identities, as specified in the SCRAM-SHA-256 specification, are ignored. SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION provides more or less the same functionality, anyway. If a user doesn't exist, perform a "mock" authentication, by constructing an authentic-looking challenge on the fly. The challenge is derived from a new system-wide random value, "mock authentication nonce", which is created at initdb, and stored in the control file. We go through these motions, in order to not give away the information on whether the user exists, to unauthenticated users. Bumps PG_CONTROL_VERSION, because of the new field in control file. Patch by Michael Paquier and Heikki Linnakangas, reviewed at different stages by Robert Haas, Stephen Frost, David Steele, Aleksander Alekseev, and many others. Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqRbR3GmFYdedCAhzukfKrgBLTLtMvENOmPrVWREsZkF8g%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqSMXU35g%3DW9X74HVeQp0uvgJxvYOuA4A-A3M%2B0wfEBv-w%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/55192AFE.6080106@iki.fi
2017-03-07 13:25:40 +01:00
<para>
For an MD5 encrypted password, <structfield>rolpassword</structfield>
column will begin with the string <literal>md5</literal> followed by a
Support SCRAM-SHA-256 authentication (RFC 5802 and 7677). This introduces a new generic SASL authentication method, similar to the GSS and SSPI methods. The server first tells the client which SASL authentication mechanism to use, and then the mechanism-specific SASL messages are exchanged in AuthenticationSASLcontinue and PasswordMessage messages. Only SCRAM-SHA-256 is supported at the moment, but this allows adding more SASL mechanisms in the future, without changing the overall protocol. Support for channel binding, aka SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS is left for later. The SASLPrep algorithm, for pre-processing the password, is not yet implemented. That could cause trouble, if you use a password with non-ASCII characters, and a client library that does implement SASLprep. That will hopefully be added later. Authorization identities, as specified in the SCRAM-SHA-256 specification, are ignored. SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION provides more or less the same functionality, anyway. If a user doesn't exist, perform a "mock" authentication, by constructing an authentic-looking challenge on the fly. The challenge is derived from a new system-wide random value, "mock authentication nonce", which is created at initdb, and stored in the control file. We go through these motions, in order to not give away the information on whether the user exists, to unauthenticated users. Bumps PG_CONTROL_VERSION, because of the new field in control file. Patch by Michael Paquier and Heikki Linnakangas, reviewed at different stages by Robert Haas, Stephen Frost, David Steele, Aleksander Alekseev, and many others. Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqRbR3GmFYdedCAhzukfKrgBLTLtMvENOmPrVWREsZkF8g%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqSMXU35g%3DW9X74HVeQp0uvgJxvYOuA4A-A3M%2B0wfEBv-w%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/55192AFE.6080106@iki.fi
2017-03-07 13:25:40 +01:00
32-character hexadecimal MD5 hash. The MD5 hash will be of the user's
password concatenated to their user name. For example, if user
<literal>joe</literal> has password <literal>xyzzy</literal>, <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
will store the md5 hash of <literal>xyzzyjoe</literal>.
</para>
<para>
If the password is encrypted with SCRAM-SHA-256, it has the format:
<synopsis>
SCRAM-SHA-256$<replaceable>&lt;iteration count&gt;</replaceable>:<replaceable>&lt;salt&gt;</replaceable>$<replaceable>&lt;StoredKey&gt;</replaceable>:<replaceable>&lt;ServerKey&gt;</replaceable>
</synopsis>
where <replaceable>salt</replaceable>, <replaceable>StoredKey</replaceable> and
<replaceable>ServerKey</replaceable> are in Base64 encoded format. This format is
the same as that specified by <ulink url="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5803">RFC 5803</ulink>.
</para>
<para>
A password that does not follow either of those formats is assumed to be
unencrypted.
Support SCRAM-SHA-256 authentication (RFC 5802 and 7677). This introduces a new generic SASL authentication method, similar to the GSS and SSPI methods. The server first tells the client which SASL authentication mechanism to use, and then the mechanism-specific SASL messages are exchanged in AuthenticationSASLcontinue and PasswordMessage messages. Only SCRAM-SHA-256 is supported at the moment, but this allows adding more SASL mechanisms in the future, without changing the overall protocol. Support for channel binding, aka SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS is left for later. The SASLPrep algorithm, for pre-processing the password, is not yet implemented. That could cause trouble, if you use a password with non-ASCII characters, and a client library that does implement SASLprep. That will hopefully be added later. Authorization identities, as specified in the SCRAM-SHA-256 specification, are ignored. SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION provides more or less the same functionality, anyway. If a user doesn't exist, perform a "mock" authentication, by constructing an authentic-looking challenge on the fly. The challenge is derived from a new system-wide random value, "mock authentication nonce", which is created at initdb, and stored in the control file. We go through these motions, in order to not give away the information on whether the user exists, to unauthenticated users. Bumps PG_CONTROL_VERSION, because of the new field in control file. Patch by Michael Paquier and Heikki Linnakangas, reviewed at different stages by Robert Haas, Stephen Frost, David Steele, Aleksander Alekseev, and many others. Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqRbR3GmFYdedCAhzukfKrgBLTLtMvENOmPrVWREsZkF8g%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAB7nPqSMXU35g%3DW9X74HVeQp0uvgJxvYOuA4A-A3M%2B0wfEBv-w%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/55192AFE.6080106@iki.fi
2017-03-07 13:25:40 +01:00
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-auth-members">
<title><structname>pg_auth_members</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-auth-members">
<primary>pg_auth_members</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_auth_members</structname> shows the membership
relations between roles. Any non-circular set of relationships is allowed.
</para>
<para>
Because user identities are cluster-wide,
<structname>pg_auth_members</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_auth_members</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_auth_members</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>roleid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
ID of a role that has a member
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>member</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
ID of a role that is a member of <structfield>roleid</structfield>
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>grantor</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
ID of the role that granted this membership
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>admin_option</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if <structfield>member</structfield> can grant membership in
<structfield>roleid</structfield> to others
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>inherit_option</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if the member automatically inherits the privileges of the
granted role
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>set_option</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if the member can
<link linkend="sql-set-role"><command>SET ROLE</command></link>
to the granted role
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-cast">
<title><structname>pg_cast</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-cast">
<primary>pg_cast</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_cast</structname> stores data type conversion
paths, both built-in and user-defined.
</para>
<para>
It should be noted that <structname>pg_cast</structname> does not represent
every type conversion that the system knows how to perform; only those that
cannot be deduced from some generic rule. For example, casting between a
domain and its base type is not explicitly represented in
<structname>pg_cast</structname>. Another important exception is that
<quote>automatic I/O conversion casts</quote>, those performed using a data
type's own I/O functions to convert to or from <type>text</type> or other
string types, are not explicitly represented in
<structname>pg_cast</structname>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_cast</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>castsource</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the source data type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>casttarget</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the target data type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>castfunc</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the function to use to perform this cast. Zero is
stored if the cast method doesn't require a function.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>castcontext</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Indicates what contexts the cast can be invoked in.
<literal>e</literal> means only as an explicit cast (using
<literal>CAST</literal> or <literal>::</literal> syntax).
<literal>a</literal> means implicitly in assignment
to a target column, as well as explicitly.
<literal>i</literal> means implicitly in expressions, as well as the
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
other cases.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>castmethod</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Indicates how the cast is performed.
<literal>f</literal> means that the function specified in the <structfield>castfunc</structfield> field is used.
<literal>i</literal> means that the input/output functions are used.
<literal>b</literal> means that the types are binary-coercible, thus no conversion is required.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
The cast functions listed in <structname>pg_cast</structname> must
always take the cast source type as their first argument type, and
return the cast destination type as their result type. A cast
function can have up to three arguments. The second argument,
if present, must be type <type>integer</type>; it receives the type
2011-02-07 00:32:27 +01:00
modifier associated with the destination type, or -1
if there is none. The third argument,
if present, must be type <type>boolean</type>; it receives <literal>true</literal>
if the cast is an explicit cast, <literal>false</literal> otherwise.
</para>
<para>
It is legitimate to create a <structname>pg_cast</structname> entry
in which the source and target types are the same, if the associated
function takes more than one argument. Such entries represent
<quote>length coercion functions</quote> that coerce values of the type
to be legal for a particular type modifier value.
</para>
<para>
When a <structname>pg_cast</structname> entry has different source and
target types and a function that takes more than one argument, it
represents converting from one type to another and applying a length
coercion in a single step. When no such entry is available, coercion
to a type that uses a type modifier involves two steps, one to
2004-12-13 19:05:10 +01:00
convert between data types and a second to apply the modifier.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-class">
<title><structname>pg_class</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-class">
<primary>pg_class</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_class</structname> describes tables and
other objects that have columns or are otherwise similar to a
table. This includes indexes (but see also <link
linkend="catalog-pg-index"><structname>pg_index</structname></link>),
sequences (but see also <link
linkend="catalog-pg-sequence"><structname>pg_sequence</structname></link>),
views, materialized views, composite types, and TOAST tables;
see <structfield>relkind</structfield>.
Below, when we mean all of these kinds of objects we speak of
<quote>relations</quote>. Not all of <structname>pg_class</structname>'s
columns are meaningful for all relation kinds.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_class</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the table, index, view, etc.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this relation
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>reltype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
2004-12-13 19:05:10 +01:00
The OID of the data type that corresponds to this table's row type,
if any; zero for indexes, sequences, and toast tables, which have
no <structname>pg_type</structname> entry
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>reloftype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
For typed tables, the OID of the underlying composite type;
zero for all other relations
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the relation
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relam</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-am"><structname>pg_am</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The access method used to access this table or index.
Not meaningful if the relation is a sequence or
has no on-disk file,
except for partitioned tables, where, if set, it takes
precedence over <varname>default_table_access_method</varname>
when determining the access method to use for partitions created
when one is not specified in the creation command.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relfilenode</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the on-disk file of this relation; zero means this
is a <quote>mapped</quote> relation whose disk file name is determined
by low-level state
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>reltablespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-tablespace"><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The tablespace in which this relation is stored.
If zero, the database's default tablespace is implied.
Not meaningful if the relation has no on-disk file,
except for partitioned tables, where this is the tablespace
in which partitions will be created when one is not
specified in the creation command.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relpages</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Size of the on-disk representation of this table in pages (of size
<symbol>BLCKSZ</symbol>). This is only an estimate used by the
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
planner. It is updated by <link linkend="sql-vacuum"><command>VACUUM</command></link>,
<link linkend="sql-analyze"><command>ANALYZE</command></link>, and a few DDL commands such as
<link linkend="sql-createindex"><command>CREATE INDEX</command></link>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>reltuples</structfield> <type>float4</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of live rows in the table. This is only an estimate used by
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
the planner. It is updated by <link linkend="sql-vacuum"><command>VACUUM</command></link>,
<link linkend="sql-analyze"><command>ANALYZE</command></link>, and a few DDL commands such as
<link linkend="sql-createindex"><command>CREATE INDEX</command></link>.
Redefine pg_class.reltuples to be -1 before the first VACUUM or ANALYZE. Historically, we've considered the state with relpages and reltuples both zero as indicating that we do not know the table's tuple density. This is problematic because it's impossible to distinguish "never yet vacuumed" from "vacuumed and seen to be empty". In particular, a user cannot use VACUUM or ANALYZE to override the planner's normal heuristic that an empty table should not be believed to be empty because it is probably about to get populated. That heuristic is a good safety measure, so I don't care to abandon it, but there should be a way to override it if the table is indeed intended to stay empty. Hence, represent the initial state of ignorance by setting reltuples to -1 (relpages is still set to zero), and apply the minimum-ten-pages heuristic only when reltuples is still -1. If the table is empty, VACUUM or ANALYZE (but not CREATE INDEX) will override that to reltuples = relpages = 0, and then we'll plan on that basis. This requires a bunch of fiddly little changes, but we can get rid of some ugly kluges that were formerly needed to maintain the old definition. One notable point is that FDWs' GetForeignRelSize methods will see baserel->tuples = -1 when no ANALYZE has been done on the foreign table. That seems like a net improvement, since those methods were formerly also in the dark about what baserel->tuples = 0 really meant. Still, it is an API change. I bumped catversion because code predating this change would get confused by seeing reltuples = -1. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/F02298E0-6EF4-49A1-BCB6-C484794D9ACC@thebuild.com
2020-08-30 18:21:51 +02:00
If the table has never yet been vacuumed or
analyzed, <structfield>reltuples</structfield>
contains <literal>-1</literal> indicating that the row count is
unknown.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relallvisible</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of pages that are marked all-visible in the table's
visibility map. This is only an estimate used by the
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
planner. It is updated by <link linkend="sql-vacuum"><command>VACUUM</command></link>,
<link linkend="sql-analyze"><command>ANALYZE</command></link>, and a few DDL commands such as
<link linkend="sql-createindex"><command>CREATE INDEX</command></link>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>reltoastrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the TOAST table associated with this table, zero if none. The
TOAST table stores large attributes <quote>out of line</quote> in a
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
secondary table.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relhasindex</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if this is a table and it has (or recently had) any indexes
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relisshared</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if this table is shared across all databases in the cluster. Only
certain system catalogs (such as <link linkend="catalog-pg-database"><structname>pg_database</structname></link>)
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
are shared.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relpersistence</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>p</literal> = permanent table/sequence, <literal>u</literal> = unlogged table/sequence,
<literal>t</literal> = temporary table/sequence
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relkind</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>r</literal> = ordinary table,
<literal>i</literal> = index,
<literal>S</literal> = sequence,
<literal>t</literal> = TOAST table,
<literal>v</literal> = view,
<literal>m</literal> = materialized view,
<literal>c</literal> = composite type,
<literal>f</literal> = foreign table,
<literal>p</literal> = partitioned table,
<literal>I</literal> = partitioned index
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relnatts</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of user columns in the relation (system columns not
counted). There must be this many corresponding entries in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>. See also
<structname>pg_attribute</structname>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relchecks</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of <literal>CHECK</literal> constraints on the table; see
<link linkend="catalog-pg-constraint"><structname>pg_constraint</structname></link> catalog
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relhasrules</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if table has (or once had) rules; see
<link linkend="catalog-pg-rewrite"><structname>pg_rewrite</structname></link> catalog
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relhastriggers</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if table has (or once had) triggers; see
<link linkend="catalog-pg-trigger"><structname>pg_trigger</structname></link> catalog
</para></entry>
</row>
Row-Level Security Policies (RLS) Building on the updatable security-barrier views work, add the ability to define policies on tables to limit the set of rows which are returned from a query and which are allowed to be added to a table. Expressions defined by the policy for filtering are added to the security barrier quals of the query, while expressions defined to check records being added to a table are added to the with-check options of the query. New top-level commands are CREATE/ALTER/DROP POLICY and are controlled by the table owner. Row Security is able to be enabled and disabled by the owner on a per-table basis using ALTER TABLE .. ENABLE/DISABLE ROW SECURITY. Per discussion, ROW SECURITY is disabled on tables by default and must be enabled for policies on the table to be used. If no policies exist on a table with ROW SECURITY enabled, a default-deny policy is used and no records will be visible. By default, row security is applied at all times except for the table owner and the superuser. A new GUC, row_security, is added which can be set to ON, OFF, or FORCE. When set to FORCE, row security will be applied even for the table owner and superusers. When set to OFF, row security will be disabled when allowed and an error will be thrown if the user does not have rights to bypass row security. Per discussion, pg_dump sets row_security = OFF by default to ensure that exports and backups will have all data in the table or will error if there are insufficient privileges to bypass row security. A new option has been added to pg_dump, --enable-row-security, to ask pg_dump to export with row security enabled. A new role capability, BYPASSRLS, which can only be set by the superuser, is added to allow other users to be able to bypass row security using row_security = OFF. Many thanks to the various individuals who have helped with the design, particularly Robert Haas for his feedback. Authors include Craig Ringer, KaiGai Kohei, Adam Brightwell, Dean Rasheed, with additional changes and rework by me. Reviewers have included all of the above, Greg Smith, Jeff McCormick, and Robert Haas.
2014-09-19 17:18:35 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relhassubclass</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if table or index has (or once had) any inheritance children or partitions
</para></entry>
Row-Level Security Policies (RLS) Building on the updatable security-barrier views work, add the ability to define policies on tables to limit the set of rows which are returned from a query and which are allowed to be added to a table. Expressions defined by the policy for filtering are added to the security barrier quals of the query, while expressions defined to check records being added to a table are added to the with-check options of the query. New top-level commands are CREATE/ALTER/DROP POLICY and are controlled by the table owner. Row Security is able to be enabled and disabled by the owner on a per-table basis using ALTER TABLE .. ENABLE/DISABLE ROW SECURITY. Per discussion, ROW SECURITY is disabled on tables by default and must be enabled for policies on the table to be used. If no policies exist on a table with ROW SECURITY enabled, a default-deny policy is used and no records will be visible. By default, row security is applied at all times except for the table owner and the superuser. A new GUC, row_security, is added which can be set to ON, OFF, or FORCE. When set to FORCE, row security will be applied even for the table owner and superusers. When set to OFF, row security will be disabled when allowed and an error will be thrown if the user does not have rights to bypass row security. Per discussion, pg_dump sets row_security = OFF by default to ensure that exports and backups will have all data in the table or will error if there are insufficient privileges to bypass row security. A new option has been added to pg_dump, --enable-row-security, to ask pg_dump to export with row security enabled. A new role capability, BYPASSRLS, which can only be set by the superuser, is added to allow other users to be able to bypass row security using row_security = OFF. Many thanks to the various individuals who have helped with the design, particularly Robert Haas for his feedback. Authors include Craig Ringer, KaiGai Kohei, Adam Brightwell, Dean Rasheed, with additional changes and rework by me. Reviewers have included all of the above, Greg Smith, Jeff McCormick, and Robert Haas.
2014-09-19 17:18:35 +02:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relrowsecurity</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
2021-04-21 08:14:43 +02:00
True if table has row-level security enabled; see
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
<link linkend="catalog-pg-policy"><structname>pg_policy</structname></link> catalog
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relforcerowsecurity</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
2021-04-21 08:14:43 +02:00
True if row-level security (when enabled) will also apply to table owner; see
<link linkend="catalog-pg-policy"><structname>pg_policy</structname></link> catalog
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relispopulated</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if relation is populated (this is true for all
relations other than some materialized views)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relreplident</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Columns used to form <quote>replica identity</quote> for rows:
<literal>d</literal> = default (primary key, if any),
<literal>n</literal> = nothing,
<literal>f</literal> = all columns,
<literal>i</literal> = index with
<structfield>indisreplident</structfield> set (same as nothing if the
index used has been dropped)
</para></entry>
</row>
Implement table partitioning. Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences. The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no sense for a relation with no data of its own. The children are called partitions and contain all of the actual data. Each partition has an implicit partitioning constraint. Multiple inheritance is not allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed. Partitions can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent does. Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed. Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries. Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned. List partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can involve multiple columns. A partitioning "column" can be an expression. Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner optimizations. The tuple routing based which this patch does based on the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible. Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova, Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others. Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 19:17:43 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relispartition</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if table or index is a partition
</para></entry>
Implement table partitioning. Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences. The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no sense for a relation with no data of its own. The children are called partitions and contain all of the actual data. Each partition has an implicit partitioning constraint. Multiple inheritance is not allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed. Partitions can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent does. Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed. Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries. Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned. List partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can involve multiple columns. A partitioning "column" can be an expression. Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner optimizations. The tuple routing based which this patch does based on the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible. Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova, Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others. Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 19:17:43 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relrewrite</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
For new relations being written during a DDL operation that requires a
table rewrite, this contains the OID of the original relation;
otherwise zero. That state is only visible internally; this field should
never contain anything other than zero for a user-visible relation.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relfrozenxid</structfield> <type>xid</type>
</para>
<para>
All transaction IDs before this one have been replaced with a permanent
(<quote>frozen</quote>) transaction ID in this table. This is used to track
whether the table needs to be vacuumed in order to prevent transaction
ID wraparound or to allow <literal>pg_xact</literal> to be shrunk. Zero
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
(<symbol>InvalidTransactionId</symbol>) if the relation is not a table.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relminmxid</structfield> <type>xid</type>
</para>
<para>
All multixact IDs before this one have been replaced by a
transaction ID in this table. This is used to track
whether the table needs to be vacuumed in order to prevent multixact ID
wraparound or to allow <literal>pg_multixact</literal> to be shrunk. Zero
(<symbol>InvalidMultiXactId</symbol>) if the relation is not a table.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>reloptions</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access-method-specific options, as <quote>keyword=value</quote> strings
</para></entry>
</row>
Implement table partitioning. Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences. The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no sense for a relation with no data of its own. The children are called partitions and contain all of the actual data. Each partition has an implicit partitioning constraint. Multiple inheritance is not allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed. Partitions can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent does. Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed. Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries. Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned. List partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can involve multiple columns. A partitioning "column" can be an expression. Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner optimizations. The tuple routing based which this patch does based on the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible. Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova, Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others. Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 19:17:43 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>relpartbound</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
Implement table partitioning. Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences. The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no sense for a relation with no data of its own. The children are called partitions and contain all of the actual data. Each partition has an implicit partitioning constraint. Multiple inheritance is not allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed. Partitions can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent does. Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed. Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries. Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned. List partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can involve multiple columns. A partitioning "column" can be an expression. Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner optimizations. The tuple routing based which this patch does based on the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible. Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova, Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others. Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 19:17:43 +01:00
If table is a partition (see <structfield>relispartition</structfield>),
internal representation of the partition bound
</para></entry>
Implement table partitioning. Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences. The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no sense for a relation with no data of its own. The children are called partitions and contain all of the actual data. Each partition has an implicit partitioning constraint. Multiple inheritance is not allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed. Partitions can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent does. Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed. Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries. Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned. List partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can involve multiple columns. A partitioning "column" can be an expression. Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner optimizations. The tuple routing based which this patch does based on the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible. Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova, Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others. Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 19:17:43 +01:00
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
Several of the Boolean flags in <structname>pg_class</structname> are maintained
lazily: they are guaranteed to be true if that's the correct state, but
may not be reset to false immediately when the condition is no longer
true. For example, <structfield>relhasindex</structfield> is set by
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
<link linkend="sql-createindex"><command>CREATE INDEX</command></link>, but it is never cleared by
<link linkend="sql-dropindex"><command>DROP INDEX</command></link>. Instead, <link linkend="sql-vacuum"><command>VACUUM</command></link> clears
<structfield>relhasindex</structfield> if it finds the table has no indexes. This
arrangement avoids race conditions and improves concurrency.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-collation">
<title><structname>pg_collation</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-collation">
<primary>pg_collation</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_collation</structname> describes the
available collations, which are essentially mappings from an SQL
name to operating system locale categories.
See <xref linkend="collation"/> for more information.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_collation</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Collation name (unique per namespace and encoding)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this collation
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the collation
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collprovider</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Provider of the collation: <literal>d</literal> = database
default, <literal>c</literal> = libc, <literal>i</literal> = icu
</para></entry>
</row>
Collations with nondeterministic comparison This adds a flag "deterministic" to collations. If that is false, such a collation disables various optimizations that assume that strings are equal only if they are byte-wise equal. That then allows use cases such as case-insensitive or accent-insensitive comparisons or handling of strings with different Unicode normal forms. This functionality is only supported with the ICU provider. At least glibc doesn't appear to have any locales that work in a nondeterministic way, so it's not worth supporting this for the libc provider. The term "deterministic comparison" in this context is from Unicode Technical Standard #10 (https://unicode.org/reports/tr10/#Deterministic_Comparison). This patch makes changes in three areas: - CREATE COLLATION DDL changes and system catalog changes to support this new flag. - Many executor nodes and auxiliary code are extended to track collations. Previously, this code would just throw away collation information, because the eventually-called user-defined functions didn't use it since they only cared about equality, which didn't need collation information. - String data type functions that do equality comparisons and hashing are changed to take the (non-)deterministic flag into account. For comparison, this just means skipping various shortcuts and tie breakers that use byte-wise comparison. For hashing, we first need to convert the input string to a canonical "sort key" using the ICU analogue of strxfrm(). Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org> Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1ccc668f-4cbc-0bef-af67-450b47cdfee7@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-22 12:09:32 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collisdeterministic</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Is the collation deterministic?
</para></entry>
Collations with nondeterministic comparison This adds a flag "deterministic" to collations. If that is false, such a collation disables various optimizations that assume that strings are equal only if they are byte-wise equal. That then allows use cases such as case-insensitive or accent-insensitive comparisons or handling of strings with different Unicode normal forms. This functionality is only supported with the ICU provider. At least glibc doesn't appear to have any locales that work in a nondeterministic way, so it's not worth supporting this for the libc provider. The term "deterministic comparison" in this context is from Unicode Technical Standard #10 (https://unicode.org/reports/tr10/#Deterministic_Comparison). This patch makes changes in three areas: - CREATE COLLATION DDL changes and system catalog changes to support this new flag. - Many executor nodes and auxiliary code are extended to track collations. Previously, this code would just throw away collation information, because the eventually-called user-defined functions didn't use it since they only cared about equality, which didn't need collation information. - String data type functions that do equality comparisons and hashing are changed to take the (non-)deterministic flag into account. For comparison, this just means skipping various shortcuts and tie breakers that use byte-wise comparison. For hashing, we first need to convert the input string to a canonical "sort key" using the ICU analogue of strxfrm(). Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org> Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1ccc668f-4cbc-0bef-af67-450b47cdfee7@2ndquadrant.com
2019-03-22 12:09:32 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collencoding</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Encoding in which the collation is applicable, or -1 if it
works for any encoding
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collcollate</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
<symbol>LC_COLLATE</symbol> for this collation object. If the provider is
not <literal>libc</literal>, <structfield>collcollate</structfield> is
<literal>NULL</literal> and <structfield>colllocale</structfield> is
used instead.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collctype</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
<symbol>LC_CTYPE</symbol> for this collation object. If the provider is
not <literal>libc</literal>, <structfield>collctype</structfield> is
<literal>NULL</literal> and <structfield>colllocale</structfield> is
used instead.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>colllocale</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Collation provider locale name for this collation object. If the
provider is <literal>libc</literal>,
<structfield>colllocale</structfield> is <literal>NULL</literal>;
<structfield>collcollate</structfield> and
<structfield>collctype</structfield> are used instead.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collicurules</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
ICU collation rules for this collation object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>collversion</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Provider-specific version of the collation. This is recorded when the
collation is created and then checked when it is used, to detect
changes in the collation definition that could lead to data corruption.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
Note that the unique key on this catalog is (<structfield>collname</structfield>,
<structfield>collencoding</structfield>, <structfield>collnamespace</structfield>) not just
(<structfield>collname</structfield>, <structfield>collnamespace</structfield>).
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname> generally ignores all
collations that do not have <structfield>collencoding</structfield> equal to
either the current database's encoding or -1, and creation of new entries
with the same name as an entry with <structfield>collencoding</structfield> = -1
is forbidden. Therefore it is sufficient to use a qualified SQL name
(<replaceable>schema</replaceable>.<replaceable>name</replaceable>) to identify a collation,
even though this is not unique according to the catalog definition.
The reason for defining the catalog this way is that
<application>initdb</application> fills it in at cluster initialization time with
entries for all locales available on the system, so it must be able to
hold entries for all encodings that might ever be used in the cluster.
</para>
<para>
In the <literal>template0</literal> database, it could be useful to create
collations whose encoding does not match the database encoding,
since they could match the encodings of databases later cloned from
<literal>template0</literal>. This would currently have to be done manually.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-constraint">
<title><structname>pg_constraint</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-constraint">
<primary>pg_constraint</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
Catalog not-null constraints We now create contype='n' pg_constraint rows for not-null constraints. We propagate these constraints to other tables during operations such as adding inheritance relationships, creating and attaching partitions and creating tables LIKE other tables. We also spawn not-null constraints for inheritance child tables when their parents have primary keys. These related constraints mostly follow the well-known rules of conislocal and coninhcount that we have for CHECK constraints, with some adaptations: for example, as opposed to CHECK constraints, we don't match not-null ones by name when descending a hierarchy to alter it, instead matching by column name that they apply to. This means we don't require the constraint names to be identical across a hierarchy. For now, we omit them for system catalogs. Maybe this is worth reconsidering. We don't support NOT VALID nor DEFERRABLE clauses either; these can be added as separate features later (this patch is already large and complicated enough.) psql shows these constraints in \d+. pg_dump requires some ad-hoc hacks, particularly when dumping a primary key. We now create one "throwaway" not-null constraint for each column in the PK together with the CREATE TABLE command, and once the PK is created, all those throwaway constraints are removed. This avoids having to check each tuple for nullness when the dump restores the primary key creation. pg_upgrading from an older release requires a somewhat brittle procedure to create a constraint state that matches what would be created if the database were being created fresh in Postgres 17. I have tested all the scenarios I could think of, and it works correctly as far as I can tell, but I could have neglected weird cases. This patch has been very long in the making. The first patch was written by Bernd Helmle in 2010 to add a new pg_constraint.contype value ('n'), which I (Álvaro) then hijacked in 2011 and 2012, until that one was killed by the realization that we ought to use contype='c' instead: manufactured CHECK constraints. However, later SQL standard development, as well as nonobvious emergent properties of that design (mostly, failure to distinguish them from "normal" CHECK constraints as well as the performance implication of having to test the CHECK expression) led us to reconsider this choice, so now the current implementation uses contype='n' again. During Postgres 16 this had already been introduced by commit e056c557aef4, but there were some problems mainly with the pg_upgrade procedure that couldn't be fixed in reasonable time, so it was reverted. In 2016 Vitaly Burovoy also worked on this feature[1] but found no consensus for his proposed approach, which was claimed to be closer to the letter of the standard, requiring an additional pg_attribute column to track the OID of the not-null constraint for that column. [1] https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
2023-08-25 13:31:24 +02:00
The catalog <structname>pg_constraint</structname> stores check, not-null,
primary key, unique, foreign key, and exclusion constraints on tables.
(Column constraints are not treated specially. Every column constraint is
equivalent to some table constraint.)
</para>
<para>
User-defined constraint triggers (created with <link linkend="sql-createtrigger">
<command>CREATE CONSTRAINT TRIGGER</command></link>) also give rise to an entry in this table.
</para>
<para>
Check constraints on domains are stored here, too.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_constraint</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Constraint name (not necessarily unique!)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>connamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this constraint
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>contype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>c</literal> = check constraint,
<literal>f</literal> = foreign key constraint,
Catalog not-null constraints We now create contype='n' pg_constraint rows for not-null constraints. We propagate these constraints to other tables during operations such as adding inheritance relationships, creating and attaching partitions and creating tables LIKE other tables. We also spawn not-null constraints for inheritance child tables when their parents have primary keys. These related constraints mostly follow the well-known rules of conislocal and coninhcount that we have for CHECK constraints, with some adaptations: for example, as opposed to CHECK constraints, we don't match not-null ones by name when descending a hierarchy to alter it, instead matching by column name that they apply to. This means we don't require the constraint names to be identical across a hierarchy. For now, we omit them for system catalogs. Maybe this is worth reconsidering. We don't support NOT VALID nor DEFERRABLE clauses either; these can be added as separate features later (this patch is already large and complicated enough.) psql shows these constraints in \d+. pg_dump requires some ad-hoc hacks, particularly when dumping a primary key. We now create one "throwaway" not-null constraint for each column in the PK together with the CREATE TABLE command, and once the PK is created, all those throwaway constraints are removed. This avoids having to check each tuple for nullness when the dump restores the primary key creation. pg_upgrading from an older release requires a somewhat brittle procedure to create a constraint state that matches what would be created if the database were being created fresh in Postgres 17. I have tested all the scenarios I could think of, and it works correctly as far as I can tell, but I could have neglected weird cases. This patch has been very long in the making. The first patch was written by Bernd Helmle in 2010 to add a new pg_constraint.contype value ('n'), which I (Álvaro) then hijacked in 2011 and 2012, until that one was killed by the realization that we ought to use contype='c' instead: manufactured CHECK constraints. However, later SQL standard development, as well as nonobvious emergent properties of that design (mostly, failure to distinguish them from "normal" CHECK constraints as well as the performance implication of having to test the CHECK expression) led us to reconsider this choice, so now the current implementation uses contype='n' again. During Postgres 16 this had already been introduced by commit e056c557aef4, but there were some problems mainly with the pg_upgrade procedure that couldn't be fixed in reasonable time, so it was reverted. In 2016 Vitaly Burovoy also worked on this feature[1] but found no consensus for his proposed approach, which was claimed to be closer to the letter of the standard, requiring an additional pg_attribute column to track the OID of the not-null constraint for that column. [1] https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
2023-08-25 13:31:24 +02:00
<literal>n</literal> = not-null constraint,
<literal>p</literal> = primary key constraint,
<literal>u</literal> = unique constraint,
<literal>t</literal> = constraint trigger,
<literal>x</literal> = exclusion constraint
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>condeferrable</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Is the constraint deferrable?
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>condeferred</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Is the constraint deferred by default?
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>convalidated</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Has the constraint been validated?
Currently, can be false only for foreign keys and CHECK constraints
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The table this constraint is on; zero if not a table constraint
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>contypid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The domain this constraint is on; zero if not a domain constraint
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conindid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The index supporting this constraint, if it's a unique, primary
key, foreign key, or exclusion constraint; else zero
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conparentid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-constraint"><structname>pg_constraint</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The corresponding constraint of the parent partitioned table,
if this is a constraint on a partition; else zero
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>confrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If a foreign key, the referenced table; else zero
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>confupdtype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Foreign key update action code:
<literal>a</literal> = no action,
<literal>r</literal> = restrict,
<literal>c</literal> = cascade,
<literal>n</literal> = set null,
<literal>d</literal> = set default
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>confdeltype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Foreign key deletion action code:
<literal>a</literal> = no action,
<literal>r</literal> = restrict,
<literal>c</literal> = cascade,
<literal>n</literal> = set null,
<literal>d</literal> = set default
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>confmatchtype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Foreign key match type:
<literal>f</literal> = full,
<literal>p</literal> = partial,
<literal>s</literal> = simple
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conislocal</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This constraint is defined locally for the relation. Note that a
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
constraint can be locally defined and inherited simultaneously.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>coninhcount</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
The number of direct inheritance ancestors this constraint has.
A constraint with
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
a nonzero number of ancestors cannot be dropped nor renamed.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>connoinherit</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This constraint is defined locally for the relation. It is a
non-inheritable constraint.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conperiod</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This constraint is defined with <literal>WITHOUT OVERLAPS</literal>
(for primary keys and unique constraints) or <literal>PERIOD</literal>
(for foreign keys).
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conkey</structfield> <type>int2[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If a table constraint (including foreign keys, but not constraint
triggers), list of the constrained columns
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>confkey</structfield> <type>int2[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If a foreign key, list of the referenced columns
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conpfeqop</structfield> <type>oid[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If a foreign key, list of the equality operators for PK = FK comparisons
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conppeqop</structfield> <type>oid[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If a foreign key, list of the equality operators for PK = PK comparisons
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conffeqop</structfield> <type>oid[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If a foreign key, list of the equality operators for FK = FK comparisons
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>confdelsetcols</structfield> <type>int2[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If a foreign key with a <literal>SET NULL</literal> or <literal>SET
DEFAULT</literal> delete action, the columns that will be updated.
If null, all of the referencing columns will be updated.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conexclop</structfield> <type>oid[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If an exclusion constraint, list of the per-column exclusion operators
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conbin</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
If a check constraint, an internal representation of the
expression. (It's recommended to use
<function>pg_get_constraintdef()</function> to extract the definition of
a check constraint.)
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
In the case of an exclusion constraint, <structfield>conkey</structfield>
is only useful for constraint elements that are simple column references.
For other cases, a zero appears in <structfield>conkey</structfield>
and the associated index must be consulted to discover the expression
that is constrained. (<structfield>conkey</structfield> thus has the
same contents as <link linkend="catalog-pg-index"><structname>pg_index</structname></link>.<structfield>indkey</structfield> for the
index.)
</para>
<note>
<para>
<literal>pg_class.relchecks</literal> needs to agree with the
number of check-constraint entries found in this table for each
relation.
</para>
</note>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-conversion">
<title><structname>pg_conversion</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-conversion">
<primary>pg_conversion</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_conversion</structname> describes
encoding conversion functions. See <xref linkend="sql-createconversion"/>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
for more information.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_conversion</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Conversion name (unique within a namespace)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>connamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this conversion
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the conversion
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conforencoding</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Source encoding ID (<link linkend="pg-encoding-to-char"><function>pg_encoding_to_char()</function></link>
can translate this number to the encoding name)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>contoencoding</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Destination encoding ID (<link linkend="pg-encoding-to-char"><function>pg_encoding_to_char()</function></link>
can translate this number to the encoding name)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>conproc</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Conversion function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>condefault</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if this is the default conversion
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-database">
<title><structname>pg_database</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-database">
<primary>pg_database</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_database</structname> stores information about
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
the available databases. Databases are created with the <link
linkend="sql-createdatabase"><command>CREATE DATABASE</command></link> command.
Consult <xref linkend="managing-databases"/> for details about the meaning
of some of the parameters.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_database</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_database</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_database</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Database name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datdba</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the database, usually the user who created it
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>encoding</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Character encoding for this database
(<link linkend="pg-encoding-to-char"><function>pg_encoding_to_char()</function></link> can translate
this number to the encoding name)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datlocprovider</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Locale provider for this database: <literal>c</literal> = libc,
<literal>i</literal> = icu
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datistemplate</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, then this database can be cloned by
any user with <literal>CREATEDB</literal> privileges;
if false, then only superusers or the owner of
the database can clone it.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datallowconn</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If false then no one can connect to this database. This is
used to protect the <literal>template0</literal> database from being altered.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>dathasloginevt</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Indicates that there are login event triggers defined for this database.
This flag is used to avoid extra lookups on the
<structname>pg_event_trigger</structname> table during each backend
startup. This flag is used internally by <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
and should not be manually altered or read for monitoring purposes.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datconnlimit</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Sets maximum number of concurrent connections that can be made
to this database. -1 means no limit, -2 indicates the database is
invalid.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datfrozenxid</structfield> <type>xid</type>
</para>
<para>
All transaction IDs before this one have been replaced with a permanent
(<quote>frozen</quote>) transaction ID in this database. This is used to
track whether the database needs to be vacuumed in order to prevent
transaction ID wraparound or to allow <literal>pg_xact</literal> to be shrunk.
It is the minimum of the per-table
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>relfrozenxid</structfield> values.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datminmxid</structfield> <type>xid</type>
</para>
<para>
All multixact IDs before this one have been replaced with a
transaction ID in this database. This is used to
track whether the database needs to be vacuumed in order to prevent
multixact ID wraparound or to allow <literal>pg_multixact</literal> to be shrunk.
It is the minimum of the per-table
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>relminmxid</structfield> values.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>dattablespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-tablespace"><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The default tablespace for the database.
Within this database, all tables for which
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>reltablespace</structfield> is zero
will be stored in this tablespace; in particular, all the non-shared
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
system catalogs will be there.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datcollate</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
LC_COLLATE for this database
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datctype</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
LC_CTYPE for this database
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datlocale</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Collation provider locale name for this database. If the
provider is <literal>libc</literal>,
<structfield>datlocale</structfield> is <literal>NULL</literal>;
<structfield>datcollate</structfield> and
<structfield>datctype</structfield> are used instead.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>daticurules</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
ICU collation rules for this database
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datcollversion</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Provider-specific version of the collation. This is recorded when the
database is created and then checked when it is used, to detect
changes in the collation definition that could lead to data corruption.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>datacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-db-role-setting">
<title><structname>pg_db_role_setting</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-db-role-setting">
<primary>pg_db_role_setting</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_db_role_setting</structname> records the default
values that have been set for run-time configuration variables,
for each role and database combination.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_db_role_setting</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_db_role_setting</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_db_role_setting</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>setdatabase</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-database"><structname>pg_database</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the database the setting is applicable to, or zero if not database-specific
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>setrole</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the role the setting is applicable to, or zero if not role-specific
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>setconfig</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Defaults for run-time configuration variables
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-default-acl">
<title><structname>pg_default_acl</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-default-acl">
<primary>pg_default_acl</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_default_acl</structname> stores initial
privileges to be assigned to newly created objects.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_default_acl</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>defaclrole</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the role associated with this entry
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>defaclnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace associated with this entry,
or zero if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>defaclobjtype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Type of object this entry is for:
<literal>r</literal> = relation (table, view),
<literal>S</literal> = sequence,
<literal>f</literal> = function,
<literal>T</literal> = type,
<literal>n</literal> = schema
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>defaclacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges that this type of object should have on creation
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
A <structname>pg_default_acl</structname> entry shows the initial privileges to
be assigned to an object belonging to the indicated user. There are
currently two types of entry: <quote>global</quote> entries with
<structfield>defaclnamespace</structfield> = zero, and <quote>per-schema</quote> entries
that reference a particular schema. If a global entry is present then
it <emphasis>overrides</emphasis> the normal hard-wired default privileges
for the object type. A per-schema entry, if present, represents privileges
to be <emphasis>added to</emphasis> the global or hard-wired default privileges.
</para>
<para>
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
Note that when an ACL entry in another catalog is null, it is taken
to represent the hard-wired default privileges for its object,
<emphasis>not</emphasis> whatever might be in <structname>pg_default_acl</structname>
at the moment. <structname>pg_default_acl</structname> is only consulted during
object creation.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-depend">
<title><structname>pg_depend</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-depend">
<primary>pg_depend</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_depend</structname> records the dependency
relationships between database objects. This information allows
<command>DROP</command> commands to find which other objects must be dropped
by <command>DROP CASCADE</command> or prevent dropping in the <command>DROP
RESTRICT</command> case.
</para>
<para>
See also <link linkend="catalog-pg-shdepend"><structname>pg_shdepend</structname></link>,
which performs a similar function for dependencies involving objects
that are shared across a database cluster.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_depend</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>classid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog the dependent object is in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the specific dependent object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objsubid</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
For a table column, this is the column number (the
<structfield>objid</structfield> and <structfield>classid</structfield> refer to the
table itself). For all other object types, this column is
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
zero.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>refclassid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog the referenced object is in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>refobjid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the specific referenced object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>refobjsubid</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
For a table column, this is the column number (the
<structfield>refobjid</structfield> and <structfield>refclassid</structfield> refer
to the table itself). For all other object types, this column
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
is zero.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>deptype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
A code defining the specific semantics of this dependency relationship; see text
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
In all cases, a <structname>pg_depend</structname> entry indicates that the
referenced object cannot be dropped without also dropping the dependent
object. However, there are several subflavors identified by
<structfield>deptype</structfield>:
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>DEPENDENCY_NORMAL</symbol> (<literal>n</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
A normal relationship between separately-created objects. The
dependent object can be dropped without affecting the
referenced object. The referenced object can only be dropped
by specifying <literal>CASCADE</literal>, in which case the dependent
object is dropped, too. Example: a table column has a normal
dependency on its data type.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>DEPENDENCY_AUTO</symbol> (<literal>a</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The dependent object can be dropped separately from the
referenced object, and should be automatically dropped
(regardless of <literal>RESTRICT</literal> or <literal>CASCADE</literal>
mode) if the referenced object is dropped. Example: a named
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
constraint on a table is made auto-dependent on the table, so
that it will go away if the table is dropped.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>DEPENDENCY_INTERNAL</symbol> (<literal>i</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The dependent object was created as part of creation of the
referenced object, and is really just a part of its internal
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
implementation. A direct <command>DROP</command> of the dependent
object will be disallowed outright (we'll tell the user to issue
a <command>DROP</command> against the referenced object, instead).
A <command>DROP</command> of the referenced object will result in
automatically dropping the dependent object
whether <literal>CASCADE</literal> is specified or not. If the
dependent object has to be dropped due to a dependency on some other
object being removed, its drop is converted to a drop of the referenced
object, so that <literal>NORMAL</literal> and <literal>AUTO</literal>
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
dependencies of the dependent object behave much like they were
dependencies of the referenced object.
Example: a view's <literal>ON SELECT</literal> rule is made
internally dependent on the view, preventing it from being dropped
while the view remains. Dependencies of the rule (such as tables it
refers to) act as if they were dependencies of the view.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
<term><symbol>DEPENDENCY_PARTITION_PRI</symbol> (<literal>P</literal>)</term>
<term><symbol>DEPENDENCY_PARTITION_SEC</symbol> (<literal>S</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The dependent object was created as part of creation of the
referenced object, and is really just a part of its internal
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
implementation; however, unlike <literal>INTERNAL</literal>,
there is more than one such referenced object. The dependent object
must not be dropped unless at least one of these referenced objects
is dropped; if any one is, the dependent object should be dropped
whether or not <literal>CASCADE</literal> is specified. Also
unlike <literal>INTERNAL</literal>, a drop of some other object
that the dependent object depends on does not result in automatic
deletion of any partition-referenced object. Hence, if the drop
does not cascade to at least one of these objects via some other
path, it will be refused. (In most cases, the dependent object
shares all its non-partition dependencies with at least one
partition-referenced object, so that this restriction does not
result in blocking any cascaded delete.)
Primary and secondary partition dependencies behave identically
except that the primary dependency is preferred for use in error
messages; hence, a partition-dependent object should have one
primary partition dependency and one or more secondary partition
dependencies.
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
Note that partition dependencies are made in addition to, not
instead of, any dependencies the object would normally have. This
simplifies <command>ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION</command> operations:
the partition dependencies need only be added or removed.
Example: a child partitioned index is made partition-dependent
on both the partition table it is on and the parent partitioned
index, so that it goes away if either of those is dropped, but
not otherwise. The dependency on the parent index is primary,
so that if the user tries to drop the child partitioned index,
the error message will suggest dropping the parent index instead
(not the table).
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>DEPENDENCY_EXTENSION</symbol> (<literal>e</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The dependent object is a member of the <firstterm>extension</firstterm> that is
the referenced object (see
<link linkend="catalog-pg-extension"><structname>pg_extension</structname></link>).
The dependent object can be dropped only via
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
<link linkend="sql-dropextension"><command>DROP EXTENSION</command></link> on the referenced object.
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
Functionally this dependency type acts the same as
an <literal>INTERNAL</literal> dependency, but it's kept separate for
clarity and to simplify <application>pg_dump</application>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>DEPENDENCY_AUTO_EXTENSION</symbol> (<literal>x</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The dependent object is not a member of the extension that is the
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
referenced object (and so it should not be ignored
by <application>pg_dump</application>), but it cannot function
without the extension and should be auto-dropped if the extension is.
The dependent object may be dropped on its own as well.
Functionally this dependency type acts the same as
an <literal>AUTO</literal> dependency, but it's kept separate for
clarity and to simplify <application>pg_dump</application>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
Other dependency flavors might be needed in future.
</para>
Redesign the partition dependency mechanism. The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had serious problems: 1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now, normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless. But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it, such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial cases exist.) 2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies had not been reconstructed. Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages. We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is cosmetic to users but causes testing problems. To fix #1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix #2, establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to, not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the usual dependencies. To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types. This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion, and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it. Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it, or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem unlikely. Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for partitioning relationships. Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11, but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend. We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's in pg_depend in existing v11 installations. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
2019-02-11 20:41:13 +01:00
<para>
Note that it's quite possible for two objects to be linked by more than
one <structname>pg_depend</structname> entry. For example, a child
partitioned index would have both a partition-type dependency on its
associated partition table, and an auto dependency on each column of
that table that it indexes. This sort of situation expresses the union
of multiple dependency semantics. A dependent object can be dropped
without <literal>CASCADE</literal> if any of its dependencies satisfies
its condition for automatic dropping. Conversely, all the
dependencies' restrictions about which objects must be dropped together
must be satisfied.
</para>
<para>
Most objects created during <application>initdb</application> are
considered <quote>pinned</quote>, which means that the system itself
depends on them. Therefore, they are never allowed to be dropped.
Also, knowing that pinned objects will not be dropped, the dependency
mechanism doesn't bother to make <structname>pg_depend</structname>
entries showing dependencies on them. Thus, for example, a table
column of type <type>numeric</type> notionally has
a <literal>NORMAL</literal> dependency on the <type>numeric</type>
data type, but no such entry actually appears
in <structname>pg_depend</structname>.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-description">
<title><structname>pg_description</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-description">
<primary>pg_description</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_description</structname> stores optional descriptions
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
(comments) for each database object. Descriptions can be manipulated
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
with the <link linkend="sql-comment"><command>COMMENT</command></link> command and viewed with
<application>psql</application>'s <literal>\d</literal> commands.
Descriptions of many built-in system objects are provided in the initial
contents of <structname>pg_description</structname>.
</para>
<para>
See also <link linkend="catalog-pg-shdescription"><structname>pg_shdescription</structname></link>,
which performs a similar function for descriptions involving objects that
are shared across a database cluster.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_description</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the object this description pertains to
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>classoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog this object appears in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objsubid</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
For a comment on a table column, this is the column number (the
<structfield>objoid</structfield> and <structfield>classoid</structfield> refer to
the table itself). For all other object types, this column is
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
zero.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>description</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Arbitrary text that serves as the description of this object
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-enum">
<title><structname>pg_enum</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-enum">
<primary>pg_enum</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The <structname>pg_enum</structname> catalog contains entries
showing the values and labels for each enum type. The
internal representation of a given enum value is actually the OID
of its associated row in <structname>pg_enum</structname>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_enum</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>enumtypid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link> entry owning this enum value
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>enumsortorder</structfield> <type>float4</type>
</para>
<para>
The sort position of this enum value within its enum type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>enumlabel</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
The textual label for this enum value
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
The OIDs for <structname>pg_enum</structname> rows follow a special
rule: even-numbered OIDs are guaranteed to be ordered in the same way
as the sort ordering of their enum type. That is, if two even OIDs
belong to the same enum type, the smaller OID must have the smaller
<structfield>enumsortorder</structfield> value. Odd-numbered OID values
need bear no relationship to the sort order. This rule allows the
enum comparison routines to avoid catalog lookups in many common cases.
The routines that create and alter enum types attempt to assign even
OIDs to enum values whenever possible.
</para>
<para>
When an enum type is created, its members are assigned sort-order
positions 1..<replaceable>n</replaceable>. But members added later might be given
negative or fractional values of <structfield>enumsortorder</structfield>.
The only requirement on these values is that they be correctly
ordered and unique within each enum type.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-event-trigger">
<title><structname>pg_event_trigger</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-event-trigger">
<primary>pg_event_trigger</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_event_trigger</structname> stores event triggers.
See <xref linkend="event-triggers"/> for more information.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_event_trigger</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>evtname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Trigger name (must be unique)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>evtevent</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Identifies the event for which this trigger fires
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>evtowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the event trigger
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>evtfoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The function to be called
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>evtenabled</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Controls in which <xref linkend="guc-session-replication-role"/> modes
the event trigger fires.
<literal>O</literal> = trigger fires in <quote>origin</quote> and <quote>local</quote> modes,
<literal>D</literal> = trigger is disabled,
<literal>R</literal> = trigger fires in <quote>replica</quote> mode,
<literal>A</literal> = trigger fires always.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>evttags</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Command tags for which this trigger will fire. If NULL, the firing
of this trigger is not restricted on the basis of the command tag.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-extension">
<title><structname>pg_extension</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-extension">
<primary>pg_extension</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_extension</structname> stores information
about the installed extensions. See <xref linkend="extend-extensions"/>
for details about extensions.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_extension</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>extname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the extension
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>extowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the extension
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>extnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Schema containing the extension's exported objects
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>extrelocatable</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if extension can be relocated to another schema
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>extversion</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Version name for the extension
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>extconfig</structfield> <type>oid[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Array of <type>regclass</type> OIDs for the extension's configuration
table(s), or <literal>NULL</literal> if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>extcondition</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Array of <literal>WHERE</literal>-clause filter conditions for the
extension's configuration table(s), or <literal>NULL</literal> if none
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
Note that unlike most catalogs with a <quote>namespace</quote> column,
<structfield>extnamespace</structfield> is not meant to imply
that the extension belongs to that schema. Extension names are never
schema-qualified. Rather, <structfield>extnamespace</structfield>
indicates the schema that contains most or all of the extension's
objects. If <structfield>extrelocatable</structfield> is true, then
this schema must in fact contain all schema-qualifiable objects
belonging to the extension.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-foreign-data-wrapper">
<title><structname>pg_foreign_data_wrapper</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-foreign-data-wrapper">
<primary>pg_foreign_data_wrapper</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_foreign_data_wrapper</structname> stores
foreign-data wrapper definitions. A foreign-data wrapper is the
mechanism by which external data, residing on foreign servers, is
accessed.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_foreign_data_wrapper</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>fdwname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the foreign-data wrapper
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>fdwowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the foreign-data wrapper
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>fdwhandler</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
References a handler function that is responsible for
supplying execution routines for the foreign-data wrapper.
Zero if no handler is provided
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>fdwvalidator</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
References a validator function that is responsible for
checking the validity of the options given to the
foreign-data wrapper, as well as options for foreign servers and user
mappings using the foreign-data wrapper. Zero if no validator
is provided
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>fdwacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>fdwoptions</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Foreign-data wrapper specific options, as <quote>keyword=value</quote> strings
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-foreign-server">
<title><structname>pg_foreign_server</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-foreign-server">
<primary>pg_foreign_server</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_foreign_server</structname> stores
foreign server definitions. A foreign server describes a source
of external data, such as a remote server. Foreign
servers are accessed via foreign-data wrappers.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_foreign_server</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srvname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the foreign server
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srvowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the foreign server
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srvfdw</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-foreign-data-wrapper"><structname>pg_foreign_data_wrapper</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the foreign-data wrapper of this foreign server
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srvtype</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Type of the server (optional)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srvversion</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Version of the server (optional)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srvacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srvoptions</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Foreign server specific options, as <quote>keyword=value</quote> strings
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-foreign-table">
<title><structname>pg_foreign_table</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-foreign-table">
<primary>pg_foreign_table</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_foreign_table</structname> contains
auxiliary information about foreign tables. A foreign table is
primarily represented by a
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>
entry, just like a regular table. Its <structname>pg_foreign_table</structname>
entry contains the information that is pertinent only to foreign tables
and not any other kind of relation.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_foreign_table</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>ftrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link> entry for this foreign table
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>ftserver</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-foreign-server"><structname>pg_foreign_server</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the foreign server for this foreign table
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>ftoptions</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Foreign table options, as <quote>keyword=value</quote> strings
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-index">
<title><structname>pg_index</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-index">
<primary>pg_index</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_index</structname> contains part of the information
about indexes. The rest is mostly in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_index</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indexrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link> entry for this index
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link> entry for the table this index is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indnatts</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
The total number of columns in the index (duplicates
<literal>pg_class.relnatts</literal>); this number includes both key and included attributes
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indnkeyatts</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
The number of <firstterm>key columns</firstterm> in the index,
not counting any <firstterm>included columns</firstterm>, which are
merely stored and do not participate in the index semantics
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indisunique</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, this is a unique index
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indnullsnotdistinct</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This value is only used for unique indexes. If false, this unique
index will consider null values distinct (so the index can contain
multiple null values in a column, the default PostgreSQL behavior). If
it is true, it will consider null values to be equal (so the index can
only contain one null value in a column).
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indisprimary</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, this index represents the primary key of the table
(<structfield>indisunique</structfield> should always be true when this is true)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indisexclusion</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, this index supports an exclusion constraint
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indimmediate</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the uniqueness check is enforced immediately on
insertion
(irrelevant if <structfield>indisunique</structfield> is not true)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indisclustered</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the table was last clustered on this index
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indisvalid</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the index is currently valid for queries. False means the
index is possibly incomplete: it must still be modified by
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
<link linkend="sql-insert"><command>INSERT</command></link>/<link linkend="sql-update"><command>UPDATE</command></link> operations, but it cannot safely
be used for queries. If it is unique, the uniqueness property is not
Fix assorted bugs in CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY. Commit 8cb53654dbdb4c386369eb988062d0bbb6de725e, which introduced DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY, managed to break CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY via a poor choice of catalog state representation. The pg_index state for an index that's reached the final pre-drop stage was the same as the state for an index just created by CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY. This meant that the (necessary) change to make RelationGetIndexList ignore about-to-die indexes also made it ignore freshly-created indexes; which is catastrophic because the latter do need to be considered in HOT-safety decisions. Failure to do so leads to incorrect index entries and subsequently wrong results from queries depending on the concurrently-created index. To fix, add an additional boolean column "indislive" to pg_index, so that the freshly-created and about-to-die states can be distinguished. (This change obviously is only possible in HEAD. This patch will need to be back-patched, but in 9.2 we'll use a kluge consisting of overloading the formerly-impossible state of indisvalid = true and indisready = false.) In addition, change CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY so that the pg_index flag changes they make without exclusive lock on the index are made via heap_inplace_update() rather than a normal transactional update. The latter is not very safe because moving the pg_index tuple could result in concurrent SnapshotNow scans finding it twice or not at all, thus possibly resulting in index corruption. This is a pre-existing bug in CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY, which was copied into the DROP code. In addition, fix various places in the code that ought to check to make sure that the indexes they are manipulating are valid and/or ready as appropriate. These represent bugs that have existed since 8.2, since a failed CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY could leave a corrupt or invalid index behind, and we ought not try to do anything that might fail with such an index. Also fix RelationReloadIndexInfo to ensure it copies all the pg_index columns that are allowed to change after initial creation. Previously we could have been left with stale values of some fields in an index relcache entry. It's not clear whether this actually had any user-visible consequences, but it's at least a bug waiting to happen. In addition, do some code and docs review for DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY; some cosmetic code cleanup but mostly addition and revision of comments. This will need to be back-patched, but in a noticeably different form, so I'm committing it to HEAD before working on the back-patch. Problem reported by Amit Kapila, diagnosis by Pavan Deolassee, fix by Tom Lane and Andres Freund.
2012-11-29 03:25:27 +01:00
guaranteed true either.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indcheckxmin</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, queries must not use the index until the <structfield>xmin</structfield>
of this <structname>pg_index</structname> row is below their <symbol>TransactionXmin</symbol>
event horizon, because the table may contain broken <link linkend="storage-hot">HOT chains</link> with
incompatible rows that they can see
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indisready</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the index is currently ready for inserts. False means the
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
index must be ignored by <link linkend="sql-insert"><command>INSERT</command></link>/<link linkend="sql-update"><command>UPDATE</command></link>
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
operations.
</para></entry>
</row>
Fix assorted bugs in CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY. Commit 8cb53654dbdb4c386369eb988062d0bbb6de725e, which introduced DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY, managed to break CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY via a poor choice of catalog state representation. The pg_index state for an index that's reached the final pre-drop stage was the same as the state for an index just created by CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY. This meant that the (necessary) change to make RelationGetIndexList ignore about-to-die indexes also made it ignore freshly-created indexes; which is catastrophic because the latter do need to be considered in HOT-safety decisions. Failure to do so leads to incorrect index entries and subsequently wrong results from queries depending on the concurrently-created index. To fix, add an additional boolean column "indislive" to pg_index, so that the freshly-created and about-to-die states can be distinguished. (This change obviously is only possible in HEAD. This patch will need to be back-patched, but in 9.2 we'll use a kluge consisting of overloading the formerly-impossible state of indisvalid = true and indisready = false.) In addition, change CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY so that the pg_index flag changes they make without exclusive lock on the index are made via heap_inplace_update() rather than a normal transactional update. The latter is not very safe because moving the pg_index tuple could result in concurrent SnapshotNow scans finding it twice or not at all, thus possibly resulting in index corruption. This is a pre-existing bug in CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY, which was copied into the DROP code. In addition, fix various places in the code that ought to check to make sure that the indexes they are manipulating are valid and/or ready as appropriate. These represent bugs that have existed since 8.2, since a failed CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY could leave a corrupt or invalid index behind, and we ought not try to do anything that might fail with such an index. Also fix RelationReloadIndexInfo to ensure it copies all the pg_index columns that are allowed to change after initial creation. Previously we could have been left with stale values of some fields in an index relcache entry. It's not clear whether this actually had any user-visible consequences, but it's at least a bug waiting to happen. In addition, do some code and docs review for DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY; some cosmetic code cleanup but mostly addition and revision of comments. This will need to be back-patched, but in a noticeably different form, so I'm committing it to HEAD before working on the back-patch. Problem reported by Amit Kapila, diagnosis by Pavan Deolassee, fix by Tom Lane and Andres Freund.
2012-11-29 03:25:27 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indislive</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Fix assorted bugs in CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY. Commit 8cb53654dbdb4c386369eb988062d0bbb6de725e, which introduced DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY, managed to break CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY via a poor choice of catalog state representation. The pg_index state for an index that's reached the final pre-drop stage was the same as the state for an index just created by CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY. This meant that the (necessary) change to make RelationGetIndexList ignore about-to-die indexes also made it ignore freshly-created indexes; which is catastrophic because the latter do need to be considered in HOT-safety decisions. Failure to do so leads to incorrect index entries and subsequently wrong results from queries depending on the concurrently-created index. To fix, add an additional boolean column "indislive" to pg_index, so that the freshly-created and about-to-die states can be distinguished. (This change obviously is only possible in HEAD. This patch will need to be back-patched, but in 9.2 we'll use a kluge consisting of overloading the formerly-impossible state of indisvalid = true and indisready = false.) In addition, change CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY so that the pg_index flag changes they make without exclusive lock on the index are made via heap_inplace_update() rather than a normal transactional update. The latter is not very safe because moving the pg_index tuple could result in concurrent SnapshotNow scans finding it twice or not at all, thus possibly resulting in index corruption. This is a pre-existing bug in CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY, which was copied into the DROP code. In addition, fix various places in the code that ought to check to make sure that the indexes they are manipulating are valid and/or ready as appropriate. These represent bugs that have existed since 8.2, since a failed CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY could leave a corrupt or invalid index behind, and we ought not try to do anything that might fail with such an index. Also fix RelationReloadIndexInfo to ensure it copies all the pg_index columns that are allowed to change after initial creation. Previously we could have been left with stale values of some fields in an index relcache entry. It's not clear whether this actually had any user-visible consequences, but it's at least a bug waiting to happen. In addition, do some code and docs review for DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY; some cosmetic code cleanup but mostly addition and revision of comments. This will need to be back-patched, but in a noticeably different form, so I'm committing it to HEAD before working on the back-patch. Problem reported by Amit Kapila, diagnosis by Pavan Deolassee, fix by Tom Lane and Andres Freund.
2012-11-29 03:25:27 +01:00
If false, the index is in process of being dropped, and should be
ignored for all purposes (including HOT-safety decisions)
</para></entry>
Fix assorted bugs in CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY. Commit 8cb53654dbdb4c386369eb988062d0bbb6de725e, which introduced DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY, managed to break CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY via a poor choice of catalog state representation. The pg_index state for an index that's reached the final pre-drop stage was the same as the state for an index just created by CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY. This meant that the (necessary) change to make RelationGetIndexList ignore about-to-die indexes also made it ignore freshly-created indexes; which is catastrophic because the latter do need to be considered in HOT-safety decisions. Failure to do so leads to incorrect index entries and subsequently wrong results from queries depending on the concurrently-created index. To fix, add an additional boolean column "indislive" to pg_index, so that the freshly-created and about-to-die states can be distinguished. (This change obviously is only possible in HEAD. This patch will need to be back-patched, but in 9.2 we'll use a kluge consisting of overloading the formerly-impossible state of indisvalid = true and indisready = false.) In addition, change CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY so that the pg_index flag changes they make without exclusive lock on the index are made via heap_inplace_update() rather than a normal transactional update. The latter is not very safe because moving the pg_index tuple could result in concurrent SnapshotNow scans finding it twice or not at all, thus possibly resulting in index corruption. This is a pre-existing bug in CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY, which was copied into the DROP code. In addition, fix various places in the code that ought to check to make sure that the indexes they are manipulating are valid and/or ready as appropriate. These represent bugs that have existed since 8.2, since a failed CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY could leave a corrupt or invalid index behind, and we ought not try to do anything that might fail with such an index. Also fix RelationReloadIndexInfo to ensure it copies all the pg_index columns that are allowed to change after initial creation. Previously we could have been left with stale values of some fields in an index relcache entry. It's not clear whether this actually had any user-visible consequences, but it's at least a bug waiting to happen. In addition, do some code and docs review for DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY; some cosmetic code cleanup but mostly addition and revision of comments. This will need to be back-patched, but in a noticeably different form, so I'm committing it to HEAD before working on the back-patch. Problem reported by Amit Kapila, diagnosis by Pavan Deolassee, fix by Tom Lane and Andres Freund.
2012-11-29 03:25:27 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indisreplident</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true this index has been chosen as <quote>replica identity</quote>
using <link linkend="sql-altertable-replica-identity"><command>ALTER TABLE ...
REPLICA IDENTITY USING INDEX ...</command></link>
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indkey</structfield> <type>int2vector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
This is an array of <structfield>indnatts</structfield> values that
Allow specifying column lists for logical replication This allows specifying an optional column list when adding a table to logical replication. The column list may be specified after the table name, enclosed in parentheses. Columns not included in this list are not sent to the subscriber, allowing the schema on the subscriber to be a subset of the publisher schema. For UPDATE/DELETE publications, the column list needs to cover all REPLICA IDENTITY columns. For INSERT publications, the column list is arbitrary and may omit some REPLICA IDENTITY columns. Furthermore, if the table uses REPLICA IDENTITY FULL, column list is not allowed. The column list can contain only simple column references. Complex expressions, function calls etc. are not allowed. This restriction could be relaxed in the future. During the initial table synchronization, only columns included in the column list are copied to the subscriber. If the subscription has several publications, containing the same table with different column lists, columns specified in any of the lists will be copied. This means all columns are replicated if the table has no column list at all (which is treated as column list with all columns), or when of the publications is defined as FOR ALL TABLES (possibly IN SCHEMA that matches the schema of the table). For partitioned tables, publish_via_partition_root determines whether the column list for the root or the leaf relation will be used. If the parameter is 'false' (the default), the list defined for the leaf relation is used. Otherwise, the column list for the root partition will be used. Psql commands \dRp+ and \d <table-name> now display any column lists. Author: Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera, Rahila Syed Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Alvaro Herrera, Vignesh C, Ibrar Ahmed, Amit Kapila, Hou zj, Peter Smith, Wang wei, Tang, Shi yu Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2L28vddB_NFdRVpuyRBJEBWjz4BSyTB=_ektNRH8NJ1jf95g@mail.gmail.com
2022-03-26 00:45:21 +01:00
indicate which table columns this index indexes. For example, a value
of <literal>1 3</literal> would mean that the first and the third table
columns make up the index entries. Key columns come before non-key
(included) columns. A zero in this array indicates that the
corresponding index attribute is an expression over the table columns,
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
rather than a simple column reference.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indcollation</structfield> <type>oidvector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-collation"><structname>pg_collation</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
For each column in the index key
(<structfield>indnkeyatts</structfield> values), this contains the OID
of the collation to use for the index, or zero if the column is not of
a collatable data type.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indclass</structfield> <type>oidvector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-opclass"><structname>pg_opclass</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
For each column in the index key
(<structfield>indnkeyatts</structfield> values), this contains the OID
of the operator class to use. See
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
<link linkend="catalog-pg-opclass"><structname>pg_opclass</structname></link> for details.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indoption</structfield> <type>int2vector</type>
</para>
<para>
This is an array of <structfield>indnkeyatts</structfield> values that
store per-column flag bits. The meaning of the bits is defined by
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
the index's access method.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indexprs</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
Expression trees (in <function>nodeToString()</function>
representation) for index attributes that are not simple column
references. This is a list with one element for each zero
entry in <structfield>indkey</structfield>. Null if all index attributes
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
are simple references.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>indpred</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
Expression tree (in <function>nodeToString()</function>
representation) for partial index predicate. Null if not a
partial index.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-inherits">
<title><structname>pg_inherits</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-inherits">
<primary>pg_inherits</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_inherits</structname> records information about
table and index inheritance hierarchies. There is one entry for each direct
parent-child table or index relationship in the database. (Indirect
inheritance can be determined by following chains of entries.)
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_inherits</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>inhrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the child table or index
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>inhparent</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the parent table or index
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>inhseqno</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
If there is more than one direct parent for a child table (multiple
inheritance), this number tells the order in which the
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
inherited columns are to be arranged. The count starts at 1.
</para>
<para>
Indexes cannot have multiple inheritance, since they can only inherit
when using declarative partitioning.
</para></entry>
</row>
ALTER TABLE ... DETACH PARTITION ... CONCURRENTLY Allow a partition be detached from its partitioned table without blocking concurrent queries, by running in two transactions and only requiring ShareUpdateExclusive in the partitioned table. Because it runs in two transactions, it cannot be used in a transaction block. This is the main reason to use dedicated syntax: so that users can choose to use the original mode if they need it. But also, it doesn't work when a default partition exists (because an exclusive lock would still need to be obtained on it, in order to change its partition constraint.) In case the second transaction is cancelled or a crash occurs, there's ALTER TABLE .. DETACH PARTITION .. FINALIZE, which executes the final steps. The main trick to make this work is the addition of column pg_inherits.inhdetachpending, initially false; can only be set true in the first part of this command. Once that is committed, concurrent transactions that use a PartitionDirectory will include or ignore partitions so marked: in optimizer they are ignored if the row is marked committed for the snapshot; in executor they are always included. As a result, and because of the way PartitionDirectory caches partition descriptors, queries that were planned before the detach will see the rows in the detached partition and queries that are planned after the detach, won't. A CHECK constraint is created that duplicates the partition constraint. This is probably not strictly necessary, and some users will prefer to remove it afterwards, but if the partition is re-attached to a partitioned table, the constraint needn't be rechecked. Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200803234854.GA24158@alvherre.pgsql
2021-03-25 22:00:28 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>inhdetachpending</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>true</literal> for a partition that is in the process of
being detached; <literal>false</literal> otherwise.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-init-privs">
<title><structname>pg_init_privs</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-init-privs">
<primary>pg_init_privs</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_init_privs</structname> records information about
the initial privileges of objects in the system. There is one entry
for each object in the database which has a non-default (non-NULL)
initial set of privileges.
</para>
<para>
Objects can have initial privileges either by having those privileges set
when the system is initialized (by <application>initdb</application>) or when the
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
object is created during a <link linkend="sql-createextension"><command>CREATE EXTENSION</command></link> and the
extension script sets initial privileges using the <link linkend="sql-grant"><command>GRANT</command></link>
system. Note that the system will automatically handle recording of the
privileges during the extension script and that extension authors need
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
only use the <command>GRANT</command> and <command>REVOKE</command>
statements in their script to have the privileges recorded. The
<literal>privtype</literal> column indicates if the initial privilege was
set by <application>initdb</application> or during a
<command>CREATE EXTENSION</command> command.
</para>
<para>
Objects which have initial privileges set by <application>initdb</application> will
have entries where <literal>privtype</literal> is
<literal>'i'</literal>, while objects which have initial privileges set
by <command>CREATE EXTENSION</command> will have entries where
<literal>privtype</literal> is <literal>'e'</literal>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_init_privs</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the specific object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>classoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog the object is in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objsubid</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
For a table column, this is the column number (the
<structfield>objoid</structfield> and <structfield>classoid</structfield> refer to the
table itself). For all other object types, this column is
zero.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>privtype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
A code defining the type of initial privilege of this object; see text
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>initprivs</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
The initial access privileges; see
<xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-language">
<title><structname>pg_language</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-language">
<primary>pg_language</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
The catalog <structname>pg_language</structname> registers
languages in which you can write functions or stored procedures.
See <xref linkend="sql-createlanguage"/>
and <xref linkend="xplang"/> for more information about language handlers.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_language</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lanname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the language
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lanowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the language
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lanispl</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This is false for internal languages (such as
<acronym>SQL</acronym>) and true for user-defined languages.
Currently, <application>pg_dump</application> still uses this
to determine which languages need to be dumped, but this might be
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
replaced by a different mechanism in the future.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lanpltrusted</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if this is a trusted language, which means that it is believed
not to grant access to anything outside the normal SQL execution
environment. Only superusers can create functions in untrusted
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
languages.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lanplcallfoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
For noninternal languages this references the language
handler, which is a special function that is responsible for
executing all functions that are written in the particular
language. Zero for internal languages.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>laninline</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
This references a function that is responsible for executing
<quote>inline</quote> anonymous code blocks
(<xref linkend="sql-do"/> blocks).
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
Zero if inline blocks are not supported.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lanvalidator</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
This references a language validator function that is responsible
for checking the syntax and validity of new functions when they
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
are created. Zero if no validator is provided.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lanacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-largeobject">
<title><structname>pg_largeobject</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-largeobject">
<primary>pg_largeobject</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_largeobject</structname> holds the data making up
<quote>large objects</quote>. A large object is identified by an OID
assigned when it is created. Each large object is broken into
segments or <quote>pages</quote> small enough to be conveniently stored as rows
in <structname>pg_largeobject</structname>.
The amount of data per page is defined to be <symbol>LOBLKSIZE</symbol> (which is currently
<literal>BLCKSZ/4</literal>, or typically 2 kB).
</para>
<para>
Prior to <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> 9.0, there was no permission structure
associated with large objects. As a result,
<structname>pg_largeobject</structname> was publicly readable and could be
used to obtain the OIDs (and contents) of all large objects in the system.
This is no longer the case; use
<link linkend="catalog-pg-largeobject-metadata"><structname>pg_largeobject_metadata</structname></link>
to obtain a list of large object OIDs.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_largeobject</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>loid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-largeobject-metadata"><structname>pg_largeobject_metadata</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Identifier of the large object that includes this page
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pageno</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Page number of this page within its large object
(counting from zero)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>data</structfield> <type>bytea</type>
</para>
<para>
Actual data stored in the large object.
This will never be more than <symbol>LOBLKSIZE</symbol> bytes and might be less.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
Each row of <structname>pg_largeobject</structname> holds data
for one page of a large object, beginning at
byte offset (<literal>pageno * LOBLKSIZE</literal>) within the object. The implementation
allows sparse storage: pages might be missing, and might be shorter than
<literal>LOBLKSIZE</literal> bytes even if they are not the last page of the object.
Missing regions within a large object read as zeroes.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-largeobject-metadata">
<title><structname>pg_largeobject_metadata</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-largeobject-metadata">
<primary>pg_largeobject_metadata</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_largeobject_metadata</structname>
holds metadata associated with large objects. The actual large object
data is stored in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-largeobject"><structname>pg_largeobject</structname></link>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_largeobject_metadata</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lomowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the large object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>lomacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
Implement multivariate n-distinct coefficients Add support for explicitly declared statistic objects (CREATE STATISTICS), allowing collection of statistics on more complex combinations that individual table columns. Companion commands DROP STATISTICS and ALTER STATISTICS ... OWNER TO / SET SCHEMA / RENAME are added too. All this DDL has been designed so that more statistic types can be added later on, such as multivariate most-common-values and multivariate histograms between columns of a single table, leaving room for permitting columns on multiple tables, too, as well as expressions. This commit only adds support for collection of n-distinct coefficient on user-specified sets of columns in a single table. This is useful to estimate number of distinct groups in GROUP BY and DISTINCT clauses; estimation errors there can cause over-allocation of memory in hashed aggregates, for instance, so it's a worthwhile problem to solve. A new special pseudo-type pg_ndistinct is used. (num-distinct estimation was deemed sufficiently useful by itself that this is worthwhile even if no further statistic types are added immediately; so much so that another version of essentially the same functionality was submitted by Kyotaro Horiguchi: https://postgr.es/m/20150828.173334.114731693.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp though this commit does not use that code.) Author: Tomas Vondra. Some code rework by Álvaro. Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, David Rowley, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Jeff Janes, Ideriha Takeshi Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/543AFA15.4080608@fuzzy.cz https://postgr.es/m/20170320190220.ixlaueanxegqd5gr@alvherre.pgsql
2017-03-24 18:06:10 +01:00
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-namespace">
<title><structname>pg_namespace</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-namespace">
<primary>pg_namespace</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_namespace</structname> stores namespaces.
A namespace is the structure underlying SQL schemas: each namespace
can have a separate collection of relations, types, etc. without name
conflicts.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_namespace</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>nspname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the namespace
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>nspowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the namespace
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>nspacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-opclass">
<title><structname>pg_opclass</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-opclass">
<primary>pg_opclass</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_opclass</structname> defines
index access method operator classes. Each operator class defines
semantics for index columns of a particular data type and a particular
index access method. An operator class essentially specifies that a
particular operator family is applicable to a particular indexable column
data type. The set of operators from the family that are actually usable
with the indexed column are whichever ones accept the column's data type
as their left-hand input.
</para>
<para>
Operator classes are described at length in <xref linkend="xindex"/>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_opclass</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opcmethod</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-am"><structname>pg_am</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Index access method operator class is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opcname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of this operator class
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opcnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Namespace of this operator class
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opcowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the operator class
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opcfamily</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-opfamily"><structname>pg_opfamily</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Operator family containing the operator class
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opcintype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Data type that the operator class indexes
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opcdefault</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if this operator class is the default for <structfield>opcintype</structfield>
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opckeytype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Type of data stored in index, or zero if same as <structfield>opcintype</structfield>
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
An operator class's <structfield>opcmethod</structfield> must match the
<structfield>opfmethod</structfield> of its containing operator family.
Also, there must be no more than one <structname>pg_opclass</structname>
row having <structfield>opcdefault</structfield> true for any given combination of
<structfield>opcmethod</structfield> and <structfield>opcintype</structfield>.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-operator">
<title><structname>pg_operator</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-operator">
<primary>pg_operator</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_operator</structname> stores information about operators.
See <xref linkend="sql-createoperator"/>
and <xref linkend="xoper"/> for more information.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_operator</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the operator
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this operator
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the operator
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprkind</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>b</literal> = infix operator (<quote>both</quote>),
or <literal>l</literal> = prefix operator (<quote>left</quote>)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprcanmerge</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This operator supports merge joins
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprcanhash</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
This operator supports hash joins
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprleft</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Type of the left operand (zero for a prefix operator)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprright</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Type of the right operand
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprresult</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Type of the result
(zero for a not-yet-defined <quote>shell</quote> operator)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprcom</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Commutator of this operator (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprnegate</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Negator of this operator (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprcode</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Function that implements this operator
(zero for a not-yet-defined <quote>shell</quote> operator)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprrest</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Restriction selectivity estimation function for this operator
(zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oprjoin</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Join selectivity estimation function for this operator
(zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-opfamily">
<title><structname>pg_opfamily</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-opfamily">
<primary>pg_opfamily</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_opfamily</structname> defines operator families.
Each operator family is a collection of operators and associated
support routines that implement the semantics specified for a particular
index access method. Furthermore, the operators in a family are all
<quote>compatible</quote>, in a way that is specified by the access method.
The operator family concept allows cross-data-type operators to be used
with indexes and to be reasoned about using knowledge of access method
semantics.
</para>
<para>
Operator families are described at length in <xref linkend="xindex"/>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_opfamily</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opfmethod</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-am"><structname>pg_am</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Index access method operator family is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opfname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of this operator family
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opfnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Namespace of this operator family
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>opfowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the operator family
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
The majority of the information defining an operator family is not in its
<structname>pg_opfamily</structname> row, but in the associated rows in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-amop"><structname>pg_amop</structname></link>,
<link linkend="catalog-pg-amproc"><structname>pg_amproc</structname></link>,
and
<link linkend="catalog-pg-opclass"><structname>pg_opclass</structname></link>.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-parameter-acl">
<title><structname>pg_parameter_acl</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-parameter-acl">
<primary>pg_parameter_acl</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_parameter_acl</structname> records configuration
parameters for which privileges have been granted to one or more roles.
No entry is made for parameters that have default privileges.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_parameter_acl</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_parameter_acl</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_parameter_acl</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>parname</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The name of a configuration parameter for which privileges are granted
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>paracl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-partitioned-table">
<title><structname>pg_partitioned_table</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-partitioned-table">
<primary>pg_partitioned_table</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_partitioned_table</structname> stores
information about how tables are partitioned.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_partitioned_table</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>partrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link> entry for this partitioned table
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>partstrat</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Partitioning strategy; <literal>h</literal> = hash partitioned table,
<literal>l</literal> = list partitioned table, <literal>r</literal> = range partitioned table
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>partnatts</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
The number of columns in the partition key
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>partdefid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link> entry for the default partition
of this partitioned table, or zero if this partitioned table does not
have a default partition
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>partattrs</structfield> <type>int2vector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
This is an array of <structfield>partnatts</structfield> values that
indicate which table columns are part of the partition key. For
example, a value of <literal>1 3</literal> would mean that the first
and the third table columns make up the partition key. A zero in this
array indicates that the corresponding partition key column is an
expression, rather than a simple column reference.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>partclass</structfield> <type>oidvector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-opclass"><structname>pg_opclass</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
For each column in the partition key, this contains the OID of the
operator class to use. See
<link linkend="catalog-pg-opclass"><structname>pg_opclass</structname></link> for details.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>partcollation</structfield> <type>oidvector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-collation"><structname>pg_collation</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
For each column in the partition key, this contains the OID of the
collation to use for partitioning, or zero if the column is not
of a collatable data type.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>partexprs</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
Expression trees (in <function>nodeToString()</function>
representation) for partition key columns that are not simple column
references. This is a list with one element for each zero
entry in <structfield>partattrs</structfield>. Null if all partition key columns
are simple references.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-policy">
<title><structname>pg_policy</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-policy">
<primary>pg_policy</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
2021-04-21 08:14:43 +02:00
The catalog <structname>pg_policy</structname> stores row-level
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
security policies for tables. A policy includes the kind of
command that it applies to (possibly all commands), the roles that it
applies to, the expression to be added as a security-barrier
qualification to queries that include the table, and the expression
to be added as a <literal>WITH CHECK</literal> option for queries that attempt to
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
add new records to the table.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_policy</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>polname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
The name of the policy
</para></entry>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>polrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The table to which the policy applies
</para></entry>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>polcmd</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
The command type to which the policy is applied:
<literal>r</literal> for <xref linkend="sql-select"/>,
<literal>a</literal> for <xref linkend="sql-insert"/>,
<literal>w</literal> for <xref linkend="sql-update"/>,
<literal>d</literal> for <xref linkend="sql-delete"/>,
or <literal>*</literal> for all
</para></entry>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>polpermissive</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Is the policy permissive or restrictive?
</para></entry>
</row>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>polroles</structfield> <type>oid[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The roles to which the policy is applied;
zero means <literal>PUBLIC</literal>
(and normally appears alone in the array)
</para></entry>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>polqual</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
The expression tree to be added to the security barrier qualifications for queries that use the table
</para></entry>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>polwithcheck</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
The expression tree to be added to the WITH CHECK qualifications for queries that attempt to add rows to the table
</para></entry>
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<note>
<para>
Policies stored in <structname>pg_policy</structname> are applied only when
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>relrowsecurity</structfield> is set for
2015-01-24 22:16:22 +01:00
their table.
</para>
</note>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-proc">
<title><structname>pg_proc</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-proc">
<primary>pg_proc</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_proc</structname> stores information about
functions, procedures, aggregate functions, and window functions
(collectively also known as routines). See <xref
linkend="sql-createfunction"/>, <xref linkend="sql-createprocedure"/>, and
<xref linkend="xfunc"/> for more information.
</para>
<para>
If <structfield>prokind</structfield> indicates that the entry is for an
aggregate function, there should be a matching row in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-aggregate"><structfield>pg_aggregate</structfield></link>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_proc</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pronamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prolang</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-language"><structname>pg_language</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Implementation language or call interface of this function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>procost</structfield> <type>float4</type>
</para>
<para>
Estimated execution cost (in units of
<xref linkend="guc-cpu-operator-cost"/>); if <structfield>proretset</structfield>,
this is cost per row returned
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prorows</structfield> <type>float4</type>
</para>
<para>
Estimated number of result rows (zero if not <structfield>proretset</structfield>)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>provariadic</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Data type of the variadic array parameter's elements,
or zero if the function does not have a variadic parameter
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prosupport</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Planner support function for this function
(see <xref linkend="xfunc-optimization"/>), or zero if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prokind</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>f</literal> for a normal function, <literal>p</literal>
for a procedure, <literal>a</literal> for an aggregate function, or
<literal>w</literal> for a window function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prosecdef</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Function is a security definer (i.e., a <quote>setuid</quote>
function)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proleakproof</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
The function has no side effects. No information about the
arguments is conveyed except via the return value. Any function
that might throw an error depending on the values of its arguments
is not leak-proof.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proisstrict</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Function returns null if any call argument is null. In that
case the function won't actually be called at all. Functions
that are not <quote>strict</quote> must be prepared to handle
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
null inputs.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proretset</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Function returns a set (i.e., multiple values of the specified
data type)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>provolatile</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>provolatile</structfield> tells whether the function's
result depends only on its input arguments, or is affected by outside
factors.
It is <literal>i</literal> for <quote>immutable</quote> functions,
which always deliver the same result for the same inputs.
It is <literal>s</literal> for <quote>stable</quote> functions,
whose results (for fixed inputs) do not change within a scan.
It is <literal>v</literal> for <quote>volatile</quote> functions,
whose results might change at any time. (Use <literal>v</literal> also
for functions with side-effects, so that calls to them cannot get
optimized away.)
</para></entry>
</row>
Determine whether it's safe to attempt a parallel plan for a query. Commit 924bcf4f16d54c55310b28f77686608684734f42 introduced a framework for parallel computation in PostgreSQL that makes most but not all built-in functions safe to execute in parallel mode. In order to have parallel query, we'll need to be able to determine whether that query contains functions (either built-in or user-defined) that cannot be safely executed in parallel mode. This requires those functions to be labeled, so this patch introduces an infrastructure for that. Some functions currently labeled as safe may need to be revised depending on how pending issues related to heavyweight locking under paralllelism are resolved. Parallel plans can't be used except for the case where the query will run to completion. If portal execution were suspended, the parallel mode restrictions would need to remain in effect during that time, but that might make other queries fail. Therefore, this patch introduces a framework that enables consideration of parallel plans only when it is known that the plan will be run to completion. This probably needs some refinement; for example, at bind time, we do not know whether a query run via the extended protocol will be execution to completion or run with a limited fetch count. Having the client indicate its intentions at bind time would constitute a wire protocol break. Some contexts in which parallel mode would be safe are not adjusted by this patch; the default is not to try parallel plans except from call sites that have been updated to say that such plans are OK. This commit doesn't introduce any parallel paths or plans; it just provides a way to determine whether they could potentially be used. I'm committing it on the theory that the remaining parallel sequential scan patches will also get committed to this release, hopefully in the not-too-distant future. Robert Haas and Amit Kapila. Reviewed (in earlier versions) by Noah Misch.
2015-09-16 21:38:47 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proparallel</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Determine whether it's safe to attempt a parallel plan for a query. Commit 924bcf4f16d54c55310b28f77686608684734f42 introduced a framework for parallel computation in PostgreSQL that makes most but not all built-in functions safe to execute in parallel mode. In order to have parallel query, we'll need to be able to determine whether that query contains functions (either built-in or user-defined) that cannot be safely executed in parallel mode. This requires those functions to be labeled, so this patch introduces an infrastructure for that. Some functions currently labeled as safe may need to be revised depending on how pending issues related to heavyweight locking under paralllelism are resolved. Parallel plans can't be used except for the case where the query will run to completion. If portal execution were suspended, the parallel mode restrictions would need to remain in effect during that time, but that might make other queries fail. Therefore, this patch introduces a framework that enables consideration of parallel plans only when it is known that the plan will be run to completion. This probably needs some refinement; for example, at bind time, we do not know whether a query run via the extended protocol will be execution to completion or run with a limited fetch count. Having the client indicate its intentions at bind time would constitute a wire protocol break. Some contexts in which parallel mode would be safe are not adjusted by this patch; the default is not to try parallel plans except from call sites that have been updated to say that such plans are OK. This commit doesn't introduce any parallel paths or plans; it just provides a way to determine whether they could potentially be used. I'm committing it on the theory that the remaining parallel sequential scan patches will also get committed to this release, hopefully in the not-too-distant future. Robert Haas and Amit Kapila. Reviewed (in earlier versions) by Noah Misch.
2015-09-16 21:38:47 +02:00
<structfield>proparallel</structfield> tells whether the function
can be safely run in parallel mode.
It is <literal>s</literal> for functions which are safe to run in
parallel mode without restriction.
It is <literal>r</literal> for functions which can be run in parallel
mode, but their execution is restricted to the parallel group leader;
parallel worker processes cannot invoke these functions.
It is <literal>u</literal> for functions which are unsafe in parallel
mode; the presence of such a function forces a serial execution plan.
</para></entry>
Determine whether it's safe to attempt a parallel plan for a query. Commit 924bcf4f16d54c55310b28f77686608684734f42 introduced a framework for parallel computation in PostgreSQL that makes most but not all built-in functions safe to execute in parallel mode. In order to have parallel query, we'll need to be able to determine whether that query contains functions (either built-in or user-defined) that cannot be safely executed in parallel mode. This requires those functions to be labeled, so this patch introduces an infrastructure for that. Some functions currently labeled as safe may need to be revised depending on how pending issues related to heavyweight locking under paralllelism are resolved. Parallel plans can't be used except for the case where the query will run to completion. If portal execution were suspended, the parallel mode restrictions would need to remain in effect during that time, but that might make other queries fail. Therefore, this patch introduces a framework that enables consideration of parallel plans only when it is known that the plan will be run to completion. This probably needs some refinement; for example, at bind time, we do not know whether a query run via the extended protocol will be execution to completion or run with a limited fetch count. Having the client indicate its intentions at bind time would constitute a wire protocol break. Some contexts in which parallel mode would be safe are not adjusted by this patch; the default is not to try parallel plans except from call sites that have been updated to say that such plans are OK. This commit doesn't introduce any parallel paths or plans; it just provides a way to determine whether they could potentially be used. I'm committing it on the theory that the remaining parallel sequential scan patches will also get committed to this release, hopefully in the not-too-distant future. Robert Haas and Amit Kapila. Reviewed (in earlier versions) by Noah Misch.
2015-09-16 21:38:47 +02:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pronargs</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of input arguments
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pronargdefaults</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of arguments that have defaults
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prorettype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Data type of the return value
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proargtypes</structfield> <type>oidvector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
An array of the data types of the function arguments. This includes
only input arguments (including <literal>INOUT</literal> and
Reconsider the handling of procedure OUT parameters. Commit 2453ea142 redefined pg_proc.proargtypes to include the types of OUT parameters, for procedures only. While that had some advantages for implementing the SQL-spec behavior of DROP PROCEDURE, it was pretty disastrous from a number of other perspectives. Notably, since the primary key of pg_proc is name + proargtypes, this made it possible to have multiple procedures with identical names + input arguments and differing output argument types. That would make it impossible to call any one of the procedures by writing just NULL (or "?", or any other data-type-free notation) for the output argument(s). The change also seems likely to cause grave confusion for client applications that examine pg_proc and expect the traditional definition of proargtypes. Hence, revert the definition of proargtypes to what it was, and undo a number of complications that had been added to support that. To support the SQL-spec behavior of DROP PROCEDURE, when there are no argmode markers in the command's parameter list, we perform the lookup both ways (that is, matching against both proargtypes and proallargtypes), succeeding if we get just one unique match. In principle this could result in ambiguous-function failures that would not happen when using only one of the two rules. However, overloading of procedure names is thought to be a pretty rare usage, so this shouldn't cause many problems in practice. Postgres-specific code such as pg_dump can defend against any possibility of such failures by being careful to specify argmodes for all procedure arguments. This also fixes a few other bugs in the area of CALL statements with named parameters, and improves the documentation a little. catversion bump forced because the representation of procedures with OUT arguments changes. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3742981.1621533210@sss.pgh.pa.us
2021-06-10 23:11:36 +02:00
<literal>VARIADIC</literal> arguments), and thus represents
the call signature of the function.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proallargtypes</structfield> <type>oid[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
An array of the data types of the function arguments. This includes
all arguments (including <literal>OUT</literal> and
<literal>INOUT</literal> arguments); however, if all the
arguments are <literal>IN</literal> arguments, this field will be null.
Note that subscripting is 1-based, whereas for historical reasons
<structfield>proargtypes</structfield> is subscripted from 0.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proargmodes</structfield> <type>char[]</type>
</para>
<para>
An array of the modes of the function arguments, encoded as
<literal>i</literal> for <literal>IN</literal> arguments,
<literal>o</literal> for <literal>OUT</literal> arguments,
<literal>b</literal> for <literal>INOUT</literal> arguments,
<literal>v</literal> for <literal>VARIADIC</literal> arguments,
<literal>t</literal> for <literal>TABLE</literal> arguments.
If all the arguments are <literal>IN</literal> arguments,
this field will be null.
Note that subscripts correspond to positions of
<structfield>proallargtypes</structfield> not <structfield>proargtypes</structfield>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proargnames</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
An array of the names of the function arguments.
Arguments without a name are set to empty strings in the array.
If none of the arguments have a name, this field will be null.
Note that subscripts correspond to positions of
<structfield>proallargtypes</structfield> not <structfield>proargtypes</structfield>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proargdefaults</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
Expression trees (in <function>nodeToString()</function> representation)
for default values. This is a list with
<structfield>pronargdefaults</structfield> elements, corresponding to the last
<replaceable>N</replaceable> <emphasis>input</emphasis> arguments (i.e., the last
<replaceable>N</replaceable> <structfield>proargtypes</structfield> positions).
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
If none of the arguments have defaults, this field will be null.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>protrftypes</structfield> <type>oid[]</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
An array of the argument/result data type(s) for which to apply
transforms (from the function's <literal>TRANSFORM</literal>
clause). Null if none.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prosrc</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
This tells the function handler how to invoke the function. It
might be the actual source code of the function for interpreted
languages, a link symbol, a file name, or just about anything
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
else, depending on the implementation language/call convention.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>probin</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Additional information about how to invoke the function.
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
Again, the interpretation is language-specific.
</para></entry>
</row>
SQL-standard function body This adds support for writing CREATE FUNCTION and CREATE PROCEDURE statements for language SQL with a function body that conforms to the SQL standard and is portable to other implementations. Instead of the PostgreSQL-specific AS $$ string literal $$ syntax, this allows writing out the SQL statements making up the body unquoted, either as a single statement: CREATE FUNCTION add(a integer, b integer) RETURNS integer LANGUAGE SQL RETURN a + b; or as a block CREATE PROCEDURE insert_data(a integer, b integer) LANGUAGE SQL BEGIN ATOMIC INSERT INTO tbl VALUES (a); INSERT INTO tbl VALUES (b); END; The function body is parsed at function definition time and stored as expression nodes in a new pg_proc column prosqlbody. So at run time, no further parsing is required. However, this form does not support polymorphic arguments, because there is no more parse analysis done at call time. Dependencies between the function and the objects it uses are fully tracked. A new RETURN statement is introduced. This can only be used inside function bodies. Internally, it is treated much like a SELECT statement. psql needs some new intelligence to keep track of function body boundaries so that it doesn't send off statements when it sees semicolons that are inside a function body. Tested-by: Jaime Casanova <jcasanov@systemguards.com.ec> Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1c11f1eb-f00c-43b7-799d-2d44132c02d7@2ndquadrant.com
2021-04-07 21:30:08 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prosqlbody</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
Pre-parsed SQL function body. This is used for SQL-language
functions when the body is given in SQL-standard notation
rather than as a string literal. It's null in other cases.
SQL-standard function body This adds support for writing CREATE FUNCTION and CREATE PROCEDURE statements for language SQL with a function body that conforms to the SQL standard and is portable to other implementations. Instead of the PostgreSQL-specific AS $$ string literal $$ syntax, this allows writing out the SQL statements making up the body unquoted, either as a single statement: CREATE FUNCTION add(a integer, b integer) RETURNS integer LANGUAGE SQL RETURN a + b; or as a block CREATE PROCEDURE insert_data(a integer, b integer) LANGUAGE SQL BEGIN ATOMIC INSERT INTO tbl VALUES (a); INSERT INTO tbl VALUES (b); END; The function body is parsed at function definition time and stored as expression nodes in a new pg_proc column prosqlbody. So at run time, no further parsing is required. However, this form does not support polymorphic arguments, because there is no more parse analysis done at call time. Dependencies between the function and the objects it uses are fully tracked. A new RETURN statement is introduced. This can only be used inside function bodies. Internally, it is treated much like a SELECT statement. psql needs some new intelligence to keep track of function body boundaries so that it doesn't send off statements when it sees semicolons that are inside a function body. Tested-by: Jaime Casanova <jcasanov@systemguards.com.ec> Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1c11f1eb-f00c-43b7-799d-2d44132c02d7@2ndquadrant.com
2021-04-07 21:30:08 +02:00
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proconfig</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Function's local settings for run-time configuration variables
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>proacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
For compiled functions, both built-in and dynamically loaded,
<structfield>prosrc</structfield> contains the function's C-language
name (link symbol).
For SQL-language functions, <structfield>prosrc</structfield> contains
the function's source text if that is specified as a string literal;
but if the function body is specified in SQL-standard style,
<structfield>prosrc</structfield> is unused (typically it's an empty
string) and <structfield>prosqlbody</structfield> contains the
pre-parsed definition.
For all other currently-known language types,
<structfield>prosrc</structfield> contains the function's source
text. <structfield>probin</structfield> is null except for
dynamically-loaded C functions, for which it gives the name of the
shared library file containing the function.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-publication">
<title><structname>pg_publication</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-publication">
<primary>pg_publication</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_publication</structname> contains all
publications created in the database. For more on publications see
<xref linkend="logical-replication-publication"/>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_publication</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pubname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the publication
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pubowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the publication
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>puballtables</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, this publication automatically includes all tables
in the database, including any that will be created in the future.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pubinsert</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, <xref linkend="sql-insert"/> operations are replicated for
tables in the publication.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pubupdate</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, <xref linkend="sql-update"/> operations are replicated for
tables in the publication.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pubdelete</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, <xref linkend="sql-delete"/> operations are replicated for
tables in the publication.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pubtruncate</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, <xref linkend="sql-truncate"/> operations are replicated for
tables in the publication.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pubviaroot</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, operations on a leaf partition are replicated using the
identity and schema of its topmost partitioned ancestor mentioned in the
publication instead of its own.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-publication-namespace">
<title><structname>pg_publication_namespace</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-publication-namespace">
<primary>pg_publication_namespace</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_publication_namespace</structname> contains the
mapping between schemas and publications in the database. This is a
many-to-many mapping.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_publication_namespace</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pnpubid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-publication"><structname>pg_publication</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Reference to publication
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>pnnspid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Reference to schema
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-publication-rel">
<title><structname>pg_publication_rel</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-publication-rel">
<primary>pg_publication_rel</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_publication_rel</structname> contains the
mapping between relations and publications in the database. This is a
many-to-many mapping. See also <xref linkend="view-pg-publication-tables"/>
for a more user-friendly view of this information.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_publication_rel</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prpubid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-publication"><structname>pg_publication</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Reference to publication
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Reference to relation
</para></entry>
</row>
Allow specifying row filters for logical replication of tables. This feature adds row filtering for publication tables. When a publication is defined or modified, an optional WHERE clause can be specified. Rows that don't satisfy this WHERE clause will be filtered out. This allows a set of tables to be partially replicated. The row filter is per table. A new row filter can be added simply by specifying a WHERE clause after the table name. The WHERE clause must be enclosed by parentheses. The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that publishes UPDATE and/or DELETE operations must contain only columns that are covered by REPLICA IDENTITY. The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that publishes INSERT can use any column. If the row filter evaluates to NULL, it is regarded as "false". The WHERE clause only allows simple expressions that don't have user-defined functions, user-defined operators, user-defined types, user-defined collations, non-immutable built-in functions, or references to system columns. These restrictions could be addressed in the future. If you choose to do the initial table synchronization, only data that satisfies the row filters is copied to the subscriber. If the subscription has several publications in which a table has been published with different WHERE clauses, rows that satisfy ANY of the expressions will be copied. If a subscriber is a pre-15 version, the initial table synchronization won't use row filters even if they are defined in the publisher. The row filters are applied before publishing the changes. If the subscription has several publications in which the same table has been published with different filters (for the same publish operation), those expressions get OR'ed together so that rows satisfying any of the expressions will be replicated. This means all the other filters become redundant if (a) one of the publications have no filter at all, (b) one of the publications was created using FOR ALL TABLES, (c) one of the publications was created using FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA and the table belongs to that same schema. If your publication contains a partitioned table, the publication parameter publish_via_partition_root determines if it uses the partition's row filter (if the parameter is false, the default) or the root partitioned table's row filter. Psql commands \dRp+ and \d <table-name> will display any row filters. Author: Hou Zhijie, Euler Taveira, Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Haiying Tang, Amit Kapila, Tomas Vondra, Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Alvaro Herrera, Andres Freund, Wei Wang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAHE3wggb715X%2BmK_DitLXF25B%3DjE6xyNCH4YOwM860JR7HarGQ%40mail.gmail.com
2022-02-22 03:24:12 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prqual</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>Expression tree (in <function>nodeToString()</function>
representation) for the relation's publication qualifying condition. Null
if there is no publication qualifying condition.</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prattrs</structfield> <type>int2vector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
This is an array of values that indicates which table columns are
part of the publication. For example, a value of <literal>1 3</literal>
would mean that the first and the third table columns are published.
A null value indicates that all columns are published.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-range">
<title><structname>pg_range</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-range">
<primary>pg_range</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_range</structname> stores information about
range types. This is in addition to the types' entries in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_range</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rngtypid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the range type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rngsubtype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the element type (subtype) of this range type
</para></entry>
</row>
2020-12-20 05:20:33 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rngmultitypid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the multirange type for this range type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rngcollation</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-collation"><structname>pg_collation</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the collation used for range comparisons, or zero if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rngsubopc</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-opclass"><structname>pg_opclass</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the subtype's operator class used for range comparisons
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rngcanonical</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the function to convert a range value into canonical form,
or zero if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rngsubdiff</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the function to return the difference between two element
values as <type>double precision</type>, or zero if none
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
<structfield>rngsubopc</structfield> (plus <structfield>rngcollation</structfield>, if the
element type is collatable) determines the sort ordering used by the range
type. <structfield>rngcanonical</structfield> is used when the element type is
discrete. <structfield>rngsubdiff</structfield> is optional but should be supplied to
improve performance of GiST indexes on the range type.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-replication-origin">
<title><structname>pg_replication_origin</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-replication-origin">
<primary>pg_replication_origin</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The <structname>pg_replication_origin</structname> catalog contains
all replication origins created. For more on replication origins
see <xref linkend="replication-origins"/>.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_replication_origin</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one copy
of <structname>pg_replication_origin</structname> per cluster, not one per
database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_replication_origin</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>roident</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
A unique, cluster-wide identifier for the replication
origin. Should never leave the system.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>roname</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The external, user defined, name of a replication
origin.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-rewrite">
<title><structname>pg_rewrite</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-rewrite">
<primary>pg_rewrite</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_rewrite</structname> stores rewrite rules for tables and views.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_rewrite</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>rulename</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Rule name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>ev_class</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The table this rule is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>ev_type</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Event type that the rule is for: 1 = <xref linkend="sql-select"/>, 2 =
<xref linkend="sql-update"/>, 3 = <xref linkend="sql-insert"/>, 4 =
<xref linkend="sql-delete"/>
</para></entry>
</row>
Changes pg_trigger and extend pg_rewrite in order to allow triggers and rules to be defined with different, per session controllable, behaviors for replication purposes. This will allow replication systems like Slony-I and, as has been stated on pgsql-hackers, other products to control the firing mechanism of triggers and rewrite rules without modifying the system catalog directly. The firing mechanisms are controlled by a new superuser-only GUC variable, session_replication_role, together with a change to pg_trigger.tgenabled and a new column pg_rewrite.ev_enabled. Both columns are a single char data type now (tgenabled was a bool before). The possible values in these attributes are: 'O' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "origin" (default) or "local". This is the default behavior. 'D' - Trigger/Rule is disabled and fires never 'A' - Trigger/Rule fires always regardless of the setting of session_replication_role 'R' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "replica" The GUC variable can only be changed as long as the system does not have any cached query plans. This will prevent changing the session role and accidentally executing stored procedures or functions that have plans cached that expand to the wrong query set due to differences in the rule firing semantics. The SQL syntax for changing a triggers/rules firing semantics is ALTER TABLE <tabname> <when> TRIGGER|RULE <name>; <when> ::= ENABLE | ENABLE ALWAYS | ENABLE REPLICA | DISABLE psql's \d command as well as pg_dump are extended in a backward compatible fashion. Jan
2007-03-20 00:38:32 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>ev_enabled</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Controls in which <xref linkend="guc-session-replication-role"/> modes
2007-03-22 16:46:56 +01:00
the rule fires.
<literal>O</literal> = rule fires in <quote>origin</quote> and <quote>local</quote> modes,
<literal>D</literal> = rule is disabled,
<literal>R</literal> = rule fires in <quote>replica</quote> mode,
<literal>A</literal> = rule fires always.
</para></entry>
Changes pg_trigger and extend pg_rewrite in order to allow triggers and rules to be defined with different, per session controllable, behaviors for replication purposes. This will allow replication systems like Slony-I and, as has been stated on pgsql-hackers, other products to control the firing mechanism of triggers and rewrite rules without modifying the system catalog directly. The firing mechanisms are controlled by a new superuser-only GUC variable, session_replication_role, together with a change to pg_trigger.tgenabled and a new column pg_rewrite.ev_enabled. Both columns are a single char data type now (tgenabled was a bool before). The possible values in these attributes are: 'O' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "origin" (default) or "local". This is the default behavior. 'D' - Trigger/Rule is disabled and fires never 'A' - Trigger/Rule fires always regardless of the setting of session_replication_role 'R' - Trigger/Rule fires when session_replication_role is "replica" The GUC variable can only be changed as long as the system does not have any cached query plans. This will prevent changing the session role and accidentally executing stored procedures or functions that have plans cached that expand to the wrong query set due to differences in the rule firing semantics. The SQL syntax for changing a triggers/rules firing semantics is ALTER TABLE <tabname> <when> TRIGGER|RULE <name>; <when> ::= ENABLE | ENABLE ALWAYS | ENABLE REPLICA | DISABLE psql's \d command as well as pg_dump are extended in a backward compatible fashion. Jan
2007-03-20 00:38:32 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>is_instead</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if the rule is an <literal>INSTEAD</literal> rule
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>ev_qual</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
Expression tree (in the form of a
<function>nodeToString()</function> representation) for the
rule's qualifying condition
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>ev_action</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
Query tree (in the form of a
<function>nodeToString()</function> representation) for the
rule's action
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<note>
<para>
<literal>pg_class.relhasrules</literal>
must be true if a table has any rules in this catalog.
</para>
</note>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-seclabel">
<title><structname>pg_seclabel</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-seclabel">
<primary>pg_seclabel</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_seclabel</structname> stores security
labels on database objects. Security labels can be manipulated
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
with the <link linkend="sql-security-label"><command>SECURITY LABEL</command></link> command. For an easier
way to view security labels, see <xref linkend="view-pg-seclabels"/>.
</para>
<para>
See also <link linkend="catalog-pg-shseclabel"><structname>pg_shseclabel</structname></link>,
which performs a similar function for security labels of database objects
that are shared across a database cluster.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_seclabel</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the object this security label pertains to
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>classoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog this object appears in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objsubid</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
For a security label on a table column, this is the column number (the
<structfield>objoid</structfield> and <structfield>classoid</structfield> refer to
the table itself). For all other object types, this column is
zero.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>provider</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The label provider associated with this label.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>label</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The security label applied to this object.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-sequence">
<title><structname>pg_sequence</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-sequence">
<primary>pg_sequence</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_sequence</structname> contains information about
sequences. Some of the information about sequences, such as the name and
the schema, is in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_sequence</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>seqrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link> entry for this sequence
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>seqtypid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Data type of the sequence
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>seqstart</structfield> <type>int8</type>
</para>
<para>
Start value of the sequence
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>seqincrement</structfield> <type>int8</type>
</para>
<para>
Increment value of the sequence
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>seqmax</structfield> <type>int8</type>
</para>
<para>
Maximum value of the sequence
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>seqmin</structfield> <type>int8</type>
</para>
<para>
Minimum value of the sequence
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>seqcache</structfield> <type>int8</type>
</para>
<para>
Cache size of the sequence
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>seqcycle</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
Whether the sequence cycles
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-shdepend">
<title><structname>pg_shdepend</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-shdepend">
<primary>pg_shdepend</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_shdepend</structname> records the
dependency relationships between database objects and shared objects,
such as roles. This information allows
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname> to ensure that those objects are
unreferenced before attempting to delete them.
</para>
<para>
See also <link linkend="catalog-pg-depend"><structname>pg_depend</structname></link>,
which performs a similar function for dependencies involving objects
within a single database.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_shdepend</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_shdepend</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_shdepend</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>dbid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-database"><structname>pg_database</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the database the dependent object is in,
or zero for a shared object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>classid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog the dependent object is in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the specific dependent object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objsubid</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
For a table column, this is the column number (the
<structfield>objid</structfield> and <structfield>classid</structfield> refer to the
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
table itself). For all other object types, this column is zero.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>refclassid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog the referenced object is in
(must be a shared catalog)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>refobjid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the specific referenced object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>deptype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
A code defining the specific semantics of this dependency relationship; see text
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
In all cases, a <structname>pg_shdepend</structname> entry indicates that
the referenced object cannot be dropped without also dropping the dependent
object. However, there are several subflavors identified by
<structfield>deptype</structfield>:
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>SHARED_DEPENDENCY_OWNER</symbol> (<literal>o</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The referenced object (which must be a role) is the owner of the
dependent object.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>SHARED_DEPENDENCY_ACL</symbol> (<literal>a</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The referenced object (which must be a role) is mentioned in the
ACL (access control list, i.e., privileges list) of the
dependent object. (A <symbol>SHARED_DEPENDENCY_ACL</symbol> entry is
not made for the owner of the object, since the owner will have
a <symbol>SHARED_DEPENDENCY_OWNER</symbol> entry anyway.)
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>SHARED_DEPENDENCY_POLICY</symbol> (<literal>r</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The referenced object (which must be a role) is mentioned as the
target of a dependent policy object.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
Prevent drop of tablespaces used by partitioned relations When a tablespace is used in a partitioned relation (per commits ca4103025dfe in pg12 for tables and 33e6c34c3267 in pg11 for indexes), it is possible to drop the tablespace, potentially causing various problems. One such was reported in bug #16577, where a rewriting ALTER TABLE causes a server crash. Protect against this by using pg_shdepend to keep track of tablespaces when used for relations that don't keep physical files; we now abort a tablespace if we see that the tablespace is referenced from any partitioned relations. Backpatch this to 11, where this problem has been latent all along. We don't try to create pg_shdepend entries for existing partitioned indexes/tables, but any ones that are modified going forward will be protected. Note slight behavior change: when trying to drop a tablespace that contains both regular tables as well as partitioned ones, you'd previously get ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE and now you'll get ERRCODE_DEPENDENT_OBJECTS_STILL_EXIST. Arguably, the latter is more correct. It is possible to add protecting pg_shdepend entries for existing tables/indexes, by doing ALTER TABLE ONLY some_partitioned_table SET TABLESPACE pg_default; ALTER TABLE ONLY some_partitioned_table SET TABLESPACE original_tablespace; for each partitioned table/index that is not in the database default tablespace. Because these partitioned objects do not have storage, no file needs to be actually moved, so it shouldn't take more time than what's required to acquire locks. This query can be used to search for such relations: SELECT ... FROM pg_class WHERE relkind IN ('p', 'I') AND reltablespace <> 0 Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16577-881633a9f9894fd5@postgresql.org Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
2021-01-14 19:32:14 +01:00
<varlistentry>
<term><symbol>SHARED_DEPENDENCY_TABLESPACE</symbol> (<literal>t</literal>)</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The referenced object (which must be a tablespace) is mentioned as
the tablespace for a relation that doesn't have storage.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
Other dependency flavors might be needed in future. Note in particular
Prevent drop of tablespaces used by partitioned relations When a tablespace is used in a partitioned relation (per commits ca4103025dfe in pg12 for tables and 33e6c34c3267 in pg11 for indexes), it is possible to drop the tablespace, potentially causing various problems. One such was reported in bug #16577, where a rewriting ALTER TABLE causes a server crash. Protect against this by using pg_shdepend to keep track of tablespaces when used for relations that don't keep physical files; we now abort a tablespace if we see that the tablespace is referenced from any partitioned relations. Backpatch this to 11, where this problem has been latent all along. We don't try to create pg_shdepend entries for existing partitioned indexes/tables, but any ones that are modified going forward will be protected. Note slight behavior change: when trying to drop a tablespace that contains both regular tables as well as partitioned ones, you'd previously get ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE and now you'll get ERRCODE_DEPENDENT_OBJECTS_STILL_EXIST. Arguably, the latter is more correct. It is possible to add protecting pg_shdepend entries for existing tables/indexes, by doing ALTER TABLE ONLY some_partitioned_table SET TABLESPACE pg_default; ALTER TABLE ONLY some_partitioned_table SET TABLESPACE original_tablespace; for each partitioned table/index that is not in the database default tablespace. Because these partitioned objects do not have storage, no file needs to be actually moved, so it shouldn't take more time than what's required to acquire locks. This query can be used to search for such relations: SELECT ... FROM pg_class WHERE relkind IN ('p', 'I') AND reltablespace <> 0 Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16577-881633a9f9894fd5@postgresql.org Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
2021-01-14 19:32:14 +01:00
that the current definition only supports roles and tablespaces as referenced
objects.
</para>
<para>
As in the <structname>pg_depend</structname> catalog, most objects
created during <application>initdb</application> are
considered <quote>pinned</quote>. No entries are made
in <structname>pg_shdepend</structname> that would have a pinned
object as either referenced or dependent object.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-shdescription">
<title><structname>pg_shdescription</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-shdescription">
<primary>pg_shdescription</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_shdescription</structname> stores optional
descriptions (comments) for shared database objects. Descriptions can be
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
manipulated with the <link linkend="sql-comment"><command>COMMENT</command></link> command and viewed with
<application>psql</application>'s <literal>\d</literal> commands.
</para>
<para>
See also <link linkend="catalog-pg-description"><structname>pg_description</structname></link>,
which performs a similar function for descriptions involving objects
within a single database.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_shdescription</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_shdescription</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_shdescription</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the object this description pertains to
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>classoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog this object appears in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>description</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Arbitrary text that serves as the description of this object
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-shseclabel">
<title><structname>pg_shseclabel</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-shseclabel">
<primary>pg_shseclabel</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_shseclabel</structname> stores security
labels on shared database objects. Security labels can be manipulated
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
with the <link linkend="sql-security-label"><command>SECURITY LABEL</command></link> command. For an easier
way to view security labels, see <xref linkend="view-pg-seclabels"/>.
</para>
<para>
See also <link linkend="catalog-pg-seclabel"><structname>pg_seclabel</structname></link>,
which performs a similar function for security labels involving objects
within a single database.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_shseclabel</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_shseclabel</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_shseclabel</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>objoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references any OID column)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the object this security label pertains to
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>classoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the system catalog this object appears in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>provider</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The label provider associated with this label.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>label</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The security label applied to this object.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-statistic">
<title><structname>pg_statistic</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-statistic">
<primary>pg_statistic</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_statistic</structname> stores
statistical data about the contents of the database. Entries are
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
created by <link linkend="sql-analyze"><command>ANALYZE</command></link>
and subsequently used by the query planner. Note that all the
statistical data is inherently approximate, even assuming that it
is up-to-date.
</para>
<para>
Normally there is one entry, with <structfield>stainherit</structfield> =
<literal>false</literal>, for each table column that has been analyzed.
If the table has inheritance children or partitions, a second entry with
<structfield>stainherit</structfield> = <literal>true</literal> is also created. This row
represents the column's statistics over the inheritance tree, i.e.,
statistics for the data you'd see with
<literal>SELECT <replaceable>column</replaceable> FROM <replaceable>table</replaceable>*</literal>,
whereas the <structfield>stainherit</structfield> = <literal>false</literal> row represents
the results of
<literal>SELECT <replaceable>column</replaceable> FROM ONLY <replaceable>table</replaceable></literal>.
</para>
<para>
<structname>pg_statistic</structname> also stores statistical data about
the values of index expressions. These are described as if they were
actual data columns; in particular, <structfield>starelid</structfield>
references the index. No entry is made for an ordinary non-expression
index column, however, since it would be redundant with the entry
for the underlying table column. Currently, entries for index expressions
always have <structfield>stainherit</structfield> = <literal>false</literal>.
</para>
<para>
Since different kinds of statistics might be appropriate for different
kinds of data, <structname>pg_statistic</structname> is designed not
to assume very much about what sort of statistics it stores. Only
extremely general statistics (such as nullness) are given dedicated
columns in <structname>pg_statistic</structname>. Everything else
is stored in <quote>slots</quote>, which are groups of associated columns
whose content is identified by a code number in one of the slot's columns.
For more information see
<filename>src/include/catalog/pg_statistic.h</filename>.
</para>
<para>
<structname>pg_statistic</structname> should not be readable by the
public, since even statistical information about a table's contents
might be considered sensitive. (Example: minimum and maximum values
of a salary column might be quite interesting.)
<link linkend="view-pg-stats"><structname>pg_stats</structname></link>
is a publicly readable view on
<structname>pg_statistic</structname> that only exposes information
about those tables that are readable by the current user.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_statistic</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>starelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The table or index that the described column belongs to
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>staattnum</structfield> <type>int2</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The number of the described column
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stainherit</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the stats include values from child tables, not just the
values in the specified relation
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stanullfrac</structfield> <type>float4</type>
</para>
<para>
The fraction of the column's entries that are null
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stawidth</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
The average stored width, in bytes, of nonnull entries
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stadistinct</structfield> <type>float4</type>
</para>
<para>
The number of distinct nonnull data values in the column.
A value greater than zero is the actual number of distinct values.
A value less than zero is the negative of a multiplier for the number
of rows in the table; for example, a column in which about 80% of the
values are nonnull and each nonnull value appears about twice on
average could be represented by <structfield>stadistinct</structfield> = -0.4.
A zero value means the number of distinct values is unknown.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stakind<replaceable>N</replaceable></structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
A code number indicating the kind of statistics stored in the
<replaceable>N</replaceable>th <quote>slot</quote> of the
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
<structname>pg_statistic</structname> row.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>staop<replaceable>N</replaceable></structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-operator"><structname>pg_operator</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
An operator used to derive the statistics stored in the
<replaceable>N</replaceable>th <quote>slot</quote>. For example, a
histogram slot would show the <literal>&lt;</literal> operator
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
that defines the sort order of the data.
Zero if the statistics kind does not require an operator.
</para></entry>
</row>
Make pg_statistic and related code account more honestly for collations. When we first put in collations support, we basically punted on teaching pg_statistic, ANALYZE, and the planner selectivity functions about that. They've just used DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID independently of the actual collation of the data. It's time to improve that, so: * Add columns to pg_statistic that record the specific collation associated with each statistics slot. * Teach ANALYZE to use the column's actual collation when comparing values for statistical purposes, and record this in the appropriate slot. (Note that type-specific typanalyze functions are now expected to fill stats->stacoll with the appropriate collation, too.) * Teach assorted selectivity functions to use the actual collation of the stats they are looking at, instead of just assuming it's DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID. This should give noticeably better results in selectivity estimates for columns with nondefault collations, at least for query clauses that use that same collation (which would be the default behavior in most cases). It's still true that comparisons with explicit COLLATE clauses different from the stored data's collation won't be well-estimated, but that's no worse than before. Also, this patch does make the first step towards doing better with that, which is that it's now theoretically possible to collect stats for a collation other than the column's own collation. Patch by me; thanks to Peter Eisentraut for review. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/14706.1544630227@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-12-14 18:52:49 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stacoll<replaceable>N</replaceable></structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-collation"><structname>pg_collation</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Make pg_statistic and related code account more honestly for collations. When we first put in collations support, we basically punted on teaching pg_statistic, ANALYZE, and the planner selectivity functions about that. They've just used DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID independently of the actual collation of the data. It's time to improve that, so: * Add columns to pg_statistic that record the specific collation associated with each statistics slot. * Teach ANALYZE to use the column's actual collation when comparing values for statistical purposes, and record this in the appropriate slot. (Note that type-specific typanalyze functions are now expected to fill stats->stacoll with the appropriate collation, too.) * Teach assorted selectivity functions to use the actual collation of the stats they are looking at, instead of just assuming it's DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID. This should give noticeably better results in selectivity estimates for columns with nondefault collations, at least for query clauses that use that same collation (which would be the default behavior in most cases). It's still true that comparisons with explicit COLLATE clauses different from the stored data's collation won't be well-estimated, but that's no worse than before. Also, this patch does make the first step towards doing better with that, which is that it's now theoretically possible to collect stats for a collation other than the column's own collation. Patch by me; thanks to Peter Eisentraut for review. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/14706.1544630227@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-12-14 18:52:49 +01:00
The collation used to derive the statistics stored in the
<replaceable>N</replaceable>th <quote>slot</quote>. For example, a
histogram slot for a collatable column would show the collation that
defines the sort order of the data. Zero for noncollatable data.
</para></entry>
Make pg_statistic and related code account more honestly for collations. When we first put in collations support, we basically punted on teaching pg_statistic, ANALYZE, and the planner selectivity functions about that. They've just used DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID independently of the actual collation of the data. It's time to improve that, so: * Add columns to pg_statistic that record the specific collation associated with each statistics slot. * Teach ANALYZE to use the column's actual collation when comparing values for statistical purposes, and record this in the appropriate slot. (Note that type-specific typanalyze functions are now expected to fill stats->stacoll with the appropriate collation, too.) * Teach assorted selectivity functions to use the actual collation of the stats they are looking at, instead of just assuming it's DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID. This should give noticeably better results in selectivity estimates for columns with nondefault collations, at least for query clauses that use that same collation (which would be the default behavior in most cases). It's still true that comparisons with explicit COLLATE clauses different from the stored data's collation won't be well-estimated, but that's no worse than before. Also, this patch does make the first step towards doing better with that, which is that it's now theoretically possible to collect stats for a collation other than the column's own collation. Patch by me; thanks to Peter Eisentraut for review. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/14706.1544630227@sss.pgh.pa.us
2018-12-14 18:52:49 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stanumbers<replaceable>N</replaceable></structfield> <type>float4[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Numerical statistics of the appropriate kind for the
<replaceable>N</replaceable>th <quote>slot</quote>, or null if the slot
kind does not involve numerical values
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stavalues<replaceable>N</replaceable></structfield> <type>anyarray</type>
</para>
<para>
Column data values of the appropriate kind for the
<replaceable>N</replaceable>th <quote>slot</quote>, or null if the slot
kind does not store any data values. Each array's element
values are actually of the specific column's data type, or a related
type such as an array's element type, so there is no way to define
these columns' type more specifically than <type>anyarray</type>.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-statistic-ext">
<title><structname>pg_statistic_ext</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-statistic-ext">
<primary>pg_statistic_ext</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_statistic_ext</structname>
holds definitions of extended planner statistics.
Each row in this catalog corresponds to a <firstterm>statistics object</firstterm>
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
created with <link linkend="sql-createstatistics"><command>CREATE STATISTICS</command></link>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_statistic_ext</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Table containing the columns described by this object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the statistics object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this statistics object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the statistics object
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxkeys</structfield> <type>int2vector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
An array of attribute numbers, indicating which table columns are
covered by this statistics object;
for example a value of <literal>1 3</literal> would
mean that the first and the third table columns are covered
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxstattarget</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>stxstattarget</structfield> controls the level of detail
of statistics accumulated for this statistics object by
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
<link linkend="sql-analyze"><command>ANALYZE</command></link>.
A zero value indicates that no statistics should be collected.
A null value says to use the maximum of the statistics targets of
the referenced columns, if set, or the system default statistics target.
Positive values of <structfield>stxstattarget</structfield>
determine the target number of <quote>most common values</quote>
to collect.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxkind</structfield> <type>char[]</type>
</para>
<para>
An array containing codes for the enabled statistics kinds;
valid values are:
<literal>d</literal> for n-distinct statistics,
<literal>f</literal> for functional dependency statistics,
<literal>m</literal> for most common values (MCV) list statistics, and
Extended statistics on expressions Allow defining extended statistics on expressions, not just just on simple column references. With this commit, expressions are supported by all existing extended statistics kinds, improving the same types of estimates. A simple example may look like this: CREATE TABLE t (a int); CREATE STATISTICS s ON mod(a,10), mod(a,20) FROM t; ANALYZE t; The collected statistics are useful e.g. to estimate queries with those expressions in WHERE or GROUP BY clauses: SELECT * FROM t WHERE mod(a,10) = 0 AND mod(a,20) = 0; SELECT 1 FROM t GROUP BY mod(a,10), mod(a,20); This introduces new internal statistics kind 'e' (expressions) which is built automatically when the statistics object definition includes any expressions. This represents single-expression statistics, as if there was an expression index (but without the index maintenance overhead). The statistics is stored in pg_statistics_ext_data as an array of composite types, which is possible thanks to 79f6a942bd. CREATE STATISTICS allows building statistics on a single expression, in which case in which case it's not possible to specify statistics kinds. A new system view pg_stats_ext_exprs can be used to display expression statistics, similarly to pg_stats and pg_stats_ext views. ALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... TYPE now treats indexes the same way it treats indexes, i.e. it drops and recreates the statistics. This means all statistics are reset, and we no longer try to preserve at least the functional dependencies. This should not be a major issue in practice, as the functional dependencies actually rely on per-column statistics, which were always reset anyway. Author: Tomas Vondra Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Dean Rasheed, Zhihong Yu Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad7891d2-e90c-b446-9fe2-7419143847d7%40enterprisedb.com
2021-03-26 23:22:01 +01:00
<literal>e</literal> for expression statistics
</para></entry>
</row>
Extended statistics on expressions Allow defining extended statistics on expressions, not just just on simple column references. With this commit, expressions are supported by all existing extended statistics kinds, improving the same types of estimates. A simple example may look like this: CREATE TABLE t (a int); CREATE STATISTICS s ON mod(a,10), mod(a,20) FROM t; ANALYZE t; The collected statistics are useful e.g. to estimate queries with those expressions in WHERE or GROUP BY clauses: SELECT * FROM t WHERE mod(a,10) = 0 AND mod(a,20) = 0; SELECT 1 FROM t GROUP BY mod(a,10), mod(a,20); This introduces new internal statistics kind 'e' (expressions) which is built automatically when the statistics object definition includes any expressions. This represents single-expression statistics, as if there was an expression index (but without the index maintenance overhead). The statistics is stored in pg_statistics_ext_data as an array of composite types, which is possible thanks to 79f6a942bd. CREATE STATISTICS allows building statistics on a single expression, in which case in which case it's not possible to specify statistics kinds. A new system view pg_stats_ext_exprs can be used to display expression statistics, similarly to pg_stats and pg_stats_ext views. ALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... TYPE now treats indexes the same way it treats indexes, i.e. it drops and recreates the statistics. This means all statistics are reset, and we no longer try to preserve at least the functional dependencies. This should not be a major issue in practice, as the functional dependencies actually rely on per-column statistics, which were always reset anyway. Author: Tomas Vondra Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Dean Rasheed, Zhihong Yu Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad7891d2-e90c-b446-9fe2-7419143847d7%40enterprisedb.com
2021-03-26 23:22:01 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxexprs</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
Expression trees (in <function>nodeToString()</function>
representation) for statistics object attributes that are not simple
column references. This is a list with one element per expression.
Null if all statistics object attributes are simple references.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
The <structname>pg_statistic_ext</structname> entry is filled in
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
completely during <link linkend="sql-createstatistics"><command>CREATE STATISTICS</command></link>, but the actual
statistical values are not computed then.
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
Subsequent <link linkend="sql-analyze"><command>ANALYZE</command></link> commands compute the desired values
and populate an entry in the
<link linkend="catalog-pg-statistic-ext-data"><structname>pg_statistic_ext_data</structname></link>
catalog.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-statistic-ext-data">
<title><structname>pg_statistic_ext_data</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-statistic-ext">
<primary>pg_statistic_ext_data</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_statistic_ext_data</structname>
holds data for extended planner statistics defined in
<link linkend="catalog-pg-statistic-ext"><structname>pg_statistic_ext</structname></link>.
Each row in this catalog corresponds to a <firstterm>statistics object</firstterm>
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
created with <link linkend="sql-createstatistics"><command>CREATE STATISTICS</command></link>.
</para>
Add stxdinherit flag to pg_statistic_ext_data Add pg_statistic_ext_data.stxdinherit flag, so that for each extended statistics definition we can store two versions of data - one for the relation alone, one for the whole inheritance tree. This is analogous to pg_statistic.stainherit, but we failed to include such flag in catalogs for extended statistics, and we had to work around it (see commits 859b3003de, 36c4bc6e72 and 20b9fa308e). This changes the relationship between the two catalogs storing extended statistics objects (pg_statistic_ext and pg_statistic_ext_data). Until now, there was a simple 1:1 mapping - for each definition there was one pg_statistic_ext_data row, and this row was inserted while creating the statistics (and then updated during ANALYZE). With the stxdinherit flag, we don't know how many rows there will be (child relations may be added after the statistics object is defined), so there may be up to two rows. We could make CREATE STATISTICS to always create both rows, but that seems wasteful - without partitioning we only need stxdinherit=false rows, and declaratively partitioned tables need only stxdinherit=true. So we no longer initialize pg_statistic_ext_data in CREATE STATISTICS, and instead make that a responsibility of ANALYZE. Which is what we do for regular statistics too. Patch by me, with extensive improvements and fixes by Justin Pryzby. Author: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210923212624.GI831%40telsasoft.com
2022-01-16 13:37:56 +01:00
<para>
Normally there is one entry, with <structfield>stxdinherit</structfield> =
<literal>false</literal>, for each statistics object that has been analyzed.
If the table has inheritance children or partitions, a second entry with
Add stxdinherit flag to pg_statistic_ext_data Add pg_statistic_ext_data.stxdinherit flag, so that for each extended statistics definition we can store two versions of data - one for the relation alone, one for the whole inheritance tree. This is analogous to pg_statistic.stainherit, but we failed to include such flag in catalogs for extended statistics, and we had to work around it (see commits 859b3003de, 36c4bc6e72 and 20b9fa308e). This changes the relationship between the two catalogs storing extended statistics objects (pg_statistic_ext and pg_statistic_ext_data). Until now, there was a simple 1:1 mapping - for each definition there was one pg_statistic_ext_data row, and this row was inserted while creating the statistics (and then updated during ANALYZE). With the stxdinherit flag, we don't know how many rows there will be (child relations may be added after the statistics object is defined), so there may be up to two rows. We could make CREATE STATISTICS to always create both rows, but that seems wasteful - without partitioning we only need stxdinherit=false rows, and declaratively partitioned tables need only stxdinherit=true. So we no longer initialize pg_statistic_ext_data in CREATE STATISTICS, and instead make that a responsibility of ANALYZE. Which is what we do for regular statistics too. Patch by me, with extensive improvements and fixes by Justin Pryzby. Author: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210923212624.GI831%40telsasoft.com
2022-01-16 13:37:56 +01:00
<structfield>stxdinherit</structfield> = <literal>true</literal> is also created.
This row represents the statistics object over the inheritance tree, i.e.,
statistics for the data you'd see with
<literal>SELECT * FROM <replaceable>table</replaceable>*</literal>,
whereas the <structfield>stxdinherit</structfield> = <literal>false</literal> row
represents the results of
<literal>SELECT * FROM ONLY <replaceable>table</replaceable></literal>.
</para>
<para>
Like <link linkend="catalog-pg-statistic"><structname>pg_statistic</structname></link>,
<structname>pg_statistic_ext_data</structname> should not be
readable by the public, since the contents might be considered sensitive.
(Example: most common combinations of values in columns might be quite
interesting.)
<link linkend="view-pg-stats-ext"><structname>pg_stats_ext</structname></link>
is a publicly readable view
on <structname>pg_statistic_ext_data</structname> (after joining
with <link linkend="catalog-pg-statistic-ext"><structname>pg_statistic_ext</structname></link>) that only exposes
information about those tables and columns that are readable by the
current user.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_statistic_ext_data</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-statistic-ext"><structname>pg_statistic_ext</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Extended statistics on expressions Allow defining extended statistics on expressions, not just just on simple column references. With this commit, expressions are supported by all existing extended statistics kinds, improving the same types of estimates. A simple example may look like this: CREATE TABLE t (a int); CREATE STATISTICS s ON mod(a,10), mod(a,20) FROM t; ANALYZE t; The collected statistics are useful e.g. to estimate queries with those expressions in WHERE or GROUP BY clauses: SELECT * FROM t WHERE mod(a,10) = 0 AND mod(a,20) = 0; SELECT 1 FROM t GROUP BY mod(a,10), mod(a,20); This introduces new internal statistics kind 'e' (expressions) which is built automatically when the statistics object definition includes any expressions. This represents single-expression statistics, as if there was an expression index (but without the index maintenance overhead). The statistics is stored in pg_statistics_ext_data as an array of composite types, which is possible thanks to 79f6a942bd. CREATE STATISTICS allows building statistics on a single expression, in which case in which case it's not possible to specify statistics kinds. A new system view pg_stats_ext_exprs can be used to display expression statistics, similarly to pg_stats and pg_stats_ext views. ALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... TYPE now treats indexes the same way it treats indexes, i.e. it drops and recreates the statistics. This means all statistics are reset, and we no longer try to preserve at least the functional dependencies. This should not be a major issue in practice, as the functional dependencies actually rely on per-column statistics, which were always reset anyway. Author: Tomas Vondra Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Dean Rasheed, Zhihong Yu Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad7891d2-e90c-b446-9fe2-7419143847d7%40enterprisedb.com
2021-03-26 23:22:01 +01:00
Extended statistics object containing the definition for this data
</para></entry>
</row>
Add stxdinherit flag to pg_statistic_ext_data Add pg_statistic_ext_data.stxdinherit flag, so that for each extended statistics definition we can store two versions of data - one for the relation alone, one for the whole inheritance tree. This is analogous to pg_statistic.stainherit, but we failed to include such flag in catalogs for extended statistics, and we had to work around it (see commits 859b3003de, 36c4bc6e72 and 20b9fa308e). This changes the relationship between the two catalogs storing extended statistics objects (pg_statistic_ext and pg_statistic_ext_data). Until now, there was a simple 1:1 mapping - for each definition there was one pg_statistic_ext_data row, and this row was inserted while creating the statistics (and then updated during ANALYZE). With the stxdinherit flag, we don't know how many rows there will be (child relations may be added after the statistics object is defined), so there may be up to two rows. We could make CREATE STATISTICS to always create both rows, but that seems wasteful - without partitioning we only need stxdinherit=false rows, and declaratively partitioned tables need only stxdinherit=true. So we no longer initialize pg_statistic_ext_data in CREATE STATISTICS, and instead make that a responsibility of ANALYZE. Which is what we do for regular statistics too. Patch by me, with extensive improvements and fixes by Justin Pryzby. Author: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210923212624.GI831%40telsasoft.com
2022-01-16 13:37:56 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxdinherit</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the stats include values from child tables, not just the
Add stxdinherit flag to pg_statistic_ext_data Add pg_statistic_ext_data.stxdinherit flag, so that for each extended statistics definition we can store two versions of data - one for the relation alone, one for the whole inheritance tree. This is analogous to pg_statistic.stainherit, but we failed to include such flag in catalogs for extended statistics, and we had to work around it (see commits 859b3003de, 36c4bc6e72 and 20b9fa308e). This changes the relationship between the two catalogs storing extended statistics objects (pg_statistic_ext and pg_statistic_ext_data). Until now, there was a simple 1:1 mapping - for each definition there was one pg_statistic_ext_data row, and this row was inserted while creating the statistics (and then updated during ANALYZE). With the stxdinherit flag, we don't know how many rows there will be (child relations may be added after the statistics object is defined), so there may be up to two rows. We could make CREATE STATISTICS to always create both rows, but that seems wasteful - without partitioning we only need stxdinherit=false rows, and declaratively partitioned tables need only stxdinherit=true. So we no longer initialize pg_statistic_ext_data in CREATE STATISTICS, and instead make that a responsibility of ANALYZE. Which is what we do for regular statistics too. Patch by me, with extensive improvements and fixes by Justin Pryzby. Author: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210923212624.GI831%40telsasoft.com
2022-01-16 13:37:56 +01:00
values in the specified relation
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxdndistinct</structfield> <type>pg_ndistinct</type>
</para>
<para>
N-distinct counts, serialized as <structname>pg_ndistinct</structname> type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxddependencies</structfield> <type>pg_dependencies</type>
</para>
<para>
Functional dependency statistics, serialized
as <structname>pg_dependencies</structname> type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxdmcv</structfield> <type>pg_mcv_list</type>
</para>
<para>
MCV (most-common values) list statistics, serialized as
<structname>pg_mcv_list</structname> type
</para></entry>
</row>
Extended statistics on expressions Allow defining extended statistics on expressions, not just just on simple column references. With this commit, expressions are supported by all existing extended statistics kinds, improving the same types of estimates. A simple example may look like this: CREATE TABLE t (a int); CREATE STATISTICS s ON mod(a,10), mod(a,20) FROM t; ANALYZE t; The collected statistics are useful e.g. to estimate queries with those expressions in WHERE or GROUP BY clauses: SELECT * FROM t WHERE mod(a,10) = 0 AND mod(a,20) = 0; SELECT 1 FROM t GROUP BY mod(a,10), mod(a,20); This introduces new internal statistics kind 'e' (expressions) which is built automatically when the statistics object definition includes any expressions. This represents single-expression statistics, as if there was an expression index (but without the index maintenance overhead). The statistics is stored in pg_statistics_ext_data as an array of composite types, which is possible thanks to 79f6a942bd. CREATE STATISTICS allows building statistics on a single expression, in which case in which case it's not possible to specify statistics kinds. A new system view pg_stats_ext_exprs can be used to display expression statistics, similarly to pg_stats and pg_stats_ext views. ALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... TYPE now treats indexes the same way it treats indexes, i.e. it drops and recreates the statistics. This means all statistics are reset, and we no longer try to preserve at least the functional dependencies. This should not be a major issue in practice, as the functional dependencies actually rely on per-column statistics, which were always reset anyway. Author: Tomas Vondra Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Dean Rasheed, Zhihong Yu Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad7891d2-e90c-b446-9fe2-7419143847d7%40enterprisedb.com
2021-03-26 23:22:01 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>stxdexpr</structfield> <type>pg_statistic[]</type>
Extended statistics on expressions Allow defining extended statistics on expressions, not just just on simple column references. With this commit, expressions are supported by all existing extended statistics kinds, improving the same types of estimates. A simple example may look like this: CREATE TABLE t (a int); CREATE STATISTICS s ON mod(a,10), mod(a,20) FROM t; ANALYZE t; The collected statistics are useful e.g. to estimate queries with those expressions in WHERE or GROUP BY clauses: SELECT * FROM t WHERE mod(a,10) = 0 AND mod(a,20) = 0; SELECT 1 FROM t GROUP BY mod(a,10), mod(a,20); This introduces new internal statistics kind 'e' (expressions) which is built automatically when the statistics object definition includes any expressions. This represents single-expression statistics, as if there was an expression index (but without the index maintenance overhead). The statistics is stored in pg_statistics_ext_data as an array of composite types, which is possible thanks to 79f6a942bd. CREATE STATISTICS allows building statistics on a single expression, in which case in which case it's not possible to specify statistics kinds. A new system view pg_stats_ext_exprs can be used to display expression statistics, similarly to pg_stats and pg_stats_ext views. ALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... TYPE now treats indexes the same way it treats indexes, i.e. it drops and recreates the statistics. This means all statistics are reset, and we no longer try to preserve at least the functional dependencies. This should not be a major issue in practice, as the functional dependencies actually rely on per-column statistics, which were always reset anyway. Author: Tomas Vondra Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Dean Rasheed, Zhihong Yu Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad7891d2-e90c-b446-9fe2-7419143847d7%40enterprisedb.com
2021-03-26 23:22:01 +01:00
</para>
<para>
Per-expression statistics, serialized as an array of
<structname>pg_statistic</structname> type
Extended statistics on expressions Allow defining extended statistics on expressions, not just just on simple column references. With this commit, expressions are supported by all existing extended statistics kinds, improving the same types of estimates. A simple example may look like this: CREATE TABLE t (a int); CREATE STATISTICS s ON mod(a,10), mod(a,20) FROM t; ANALYZE t; The collected statistics are useful e.g. to estimate queries with those expressions in WHERE or GROUP BY clauses: SELECT * FROM t WHERE mod(a,10) = 0 AND mod(a,20) = 0; SELECT 1 FROM t GROUP BY mod(a,10), mod(a,20); This introduces new internal statistics kind 'e' (expressions) which is built automatically when the statistics object definition includes any expressions. This represents single-expression statistics, as if there was an expression index (but without the index maintenance overhead). The statistics is stored in pg_statistics_ext_data as an array of composite types, which is possible thanks to 79f6a942bd. CREATE STATISTICS allows building statistics on a single expression, in which case in which case it's not possible to specify statistics kinds. A new system view pg_stats_ext_exprs can be used to display expression statistics, similarly to pg_stats and pg_stats_ext views. ALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... TYPE now treats indexes the same way it treats indexes, i.e. it drops and recreates the statistics. This means all statistics are reset, and we no longer try to preserve at least the functional dependencies. This should not be a major issue in practice, as the functional dependencies actually rely on per-column statistics, which were always reset anyway. Author: Tomas Vondra Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Dean Rasheed, Zhihong Yu Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad7891d2-e90c-b446-9fe2-7419143847d7%40enterprisedb.com
2021-03-26 23:22:01 +01:00
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-subscription">
<title><structname>pg_subscription</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-subscription">
<primary>pg_subscription</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_subscription</structname> contains all existing
logical replication subscriptions. For more information about logical
replication see <xref linkend="logical-replication"/>.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_subscription</structname> is
shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one copy
of <structname>pg_subscription</structname> per cluster, not one per
database.
</para>
<para>
Access to the column <structfield>subconninfo</structfield> is revoked from
normal users, because it could contain plain-text passwords.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_subscription</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subdbid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-database"><structname>pg_database</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the database that the subscription resides in
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subskiplsn</structfield> <type>pg_lsn</type>
</para>
<para>
Finish LSN of the transaction whose changes are to be skipped, if a valid
LSN; otherwise <literal>0/0</literal>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the subscription
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the subscription
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subenabled</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the subscription is enabled and should be replicating
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subbinary</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the subscription will request that the publisher send data
in binary format
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Perform apply of large transactions by parallel workers. Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to be applied via parallel workers. In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to "partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker available. This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available. The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour). In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for publications on servers < PG16. Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-09 02:30:39 +01:00
<structfield>substream</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Perform apply of large transactions by parallel workers. Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to be applied via parallel workers. In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to "partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker available. This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available. The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour). In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for publications on servers < PG16. Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-09 02:30:39 +01:00
Controls how to handle the streaming of in-progress transactions:
<literal>f</literal> = disallow streaming of in-progress transactions,
<literal>t</literal> = spill the changes of in-progress transactions to
disk and apply at once after the transaction is committed on the
publisher and received by the subscriber,
<literal>p</literal> = apply changes directly using a parallel apply
worker if available (same as <literal>t</literal> if no worker is
available)
</para></entry>
</row>
Add support for prepared transactions to built-in logical replication. To add support for streaming transactions at prepare time into the built-in logical replication, we need to do the following things: * Modify the output plugin (pgoutput) to implement the new two-phase API callbacks, by leveraging the extended replication protocol. * Modify the replication apply worker, to properly handle two-phase transactions by replaying them on prepare. * Add a new SUBSCRIPTION option "two_phase" to allow users to enable two-phase transactions. We enable the two_phase once the initial data sync is over. We however must explicitly disable replication of two-phase transactions during replication slot creation, even if the plugin supports it. We don't need to replicate the changes accumulated during this phase, and moreover, we don't have a replication connection open so we don't know where to send the data anyway. The streaming option is not allowed with this new two_phase option. This can be done as a separate patch. We don't allow to toggle two_phase option of a subscription because it can lead to an inconsistent replica. For the same reason, we don't allow to refresh the publication once the two_phase is enabled for a subscription unless copy_data option is false. Author: Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Sawada Masahiko, Vignesh C, Dilip Kumar, Takamichi Osumi, Greg Nancarrow Tested-By: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+opiV4aFTmWWUF9h_32=HfPOW9vZASHarT0UA5oBrtGw@mail.gmail.com
2021-07-14 04:03:50 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subtwophasestate</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
State codes for two-phase mode:
<literal>d</literal> = disabled,
<literal>p</literal> = pending enablement,
<literal>e</literal> = enabled
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subdisableonerr</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the subscription will be disabled if one of its workers
detects an error
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subpasswordrequired</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the subscription will be required to specify a password
for authentication
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subrunasowner</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the subscription will be run with the permissions
of the subscription owner
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subfailover</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
If true, the associated replication slots (i.e. the main slot and the
table sync slots) in the upstream database are enabled to be
synchronized to the standbys
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subconninfo</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Connection string to the upstream database
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subslotname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Name of the replication slot in the upstream database (also used
for the local replication origin name);
null represents <literal>NONE</literal>
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subsynccommit</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The <varname>synchronous_commit</varname>
setting for the subscription's workers to use
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>subpublications</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Array of subscribed publication names. These reference
publications defined in the upstream database. For more on publications
see <xref linkend="logical-replication-publication"/>.
</para></entry>
</row>
2022-07-21 05:17:38 +02:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>suborigin</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
The origin value must be either <literal>none</literal> or
<literal>any</literal>. The default is <literal>any</literal>.
If <literal>none</literal>, the subscription will request the publisher
to only send changes that don't have an origin. If
<literal>any</literal>, the publisher sends changes regardless of their
origin.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-subscription-rel">
<title><structname>pg_subscription_rel</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-subscription-rel">
<primary>pg_subscription_rel</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_subscription_rel</structname> contains the
state for each replicated relation in each subscription. This is a
many-to-many mapping.
</para>
<para>
This catalog only contains tables known to the subscription after running
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
either <link linkend="sql-createsubscription"><command>CREATE SUBSCRIPTION</command></link> or
<link linkend="sql-altersubscription"><command>ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... REFRESH
PUBLICATION</command></link>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_subscription_rel</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srsubid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-subscription"><structname>pg_subscription</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Reference to subscription
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Reference to relation
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srsubstate</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
State code:
<literal>i</literal> = initialize,
<literal>d</literal> = data is being copied,
Allow multiple xacts during table sync in logical replication. For the initial table data synchronization in logical replication, we use a single transaction to copy the entire table and then synchronize the position in the stream with the main apply worker. There are multiple downsides of this approach: (a) We have to perform the entire copy operation again if there is any error (network breakdown, error in the database operation, etc.) while we synchronize the WAL position between tablesync worker and apply worker; this will be onerous especially for large copies, (b) Using a single transaction in the synchronization-phase (where we can receive WAL from multiple transactions) will have the risk of exceeding the CID limit, (c) The slot will hold the WAL till the entire sync is complete because we never commit till the end. This patch solves all the above downsides by allowing multiple transactions during the tablesync phase. The initial copy is done in a single transaction and after that, we commit each transaction as we receive. To allow recovery after any error or crash, we use a permanent slot and origin to track the progress. The slot and origin will be removed once we finish the synchronization of the table. We also remove slot and origin of tablesync workers if the user performs DROP SUBSCRIPTION .. or ALTER SUBSCRIPTION .. REFERESH and some of the table syncs are still not finished. The commands ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... REFRESH PUBLICATION and ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... SET PUBLICATION ... with refresh option as true cannot be executed inside a transaction block because they can now drop the slots for which we have no provision to rollback. This will also open up the path for logical replication of 2PC transactions on the subscriber side. Previously, we can't do that because of the requirement of maintaining a single transaction in tablesync workers. Bump catalog version due to change of state in the catalog (pg_subscription_rel). Author: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila, and Takamichi Osumi Reviewed-by: Ajin Cherian, Petr Jelinek, Hou Zhijie and Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1KHJxaZS-fod-0fey=0tq3=Gkn4ho=8N4-5HWiCfu0H1A@mail.gmail.com
2021-02-12 03:11:51 +01:00
<literal>f</literal> = finished table copy,
<literal>s</literal> = synchronized,
<literal>r</literal> = ready (normal replication)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>srsublsn</structfield> <type>pg_lsn</type>
</para>
<para>
Remote LSN of the state change used for synchronization coordination
when in <literal>s</literal> or <literal>r</literal> states,
otherwise null
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-tablespace">
<title><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-tablespace">
<primary>pg_tablespace</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_tablespace</structname> stores information
about the available tablespaces. Tables can be placed in particular
tablespaces to aid administration of disk layout.
</para>
<para>
Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_tablespace</structname>
is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
copy of <structname>pg_tablespace</structname> per cluster, not
one per database.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_tablespace</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>spcname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Tablespace name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>spcowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the tablespace, usually the user who created it
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>spcacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>spcoptions</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Tablespace-level options, as <quote>keyword=value</quote> strings
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-transform">
<title><structname>pg_transform</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-transform">
<primary>pg_transform</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_transform</structname> stores information about
transforms, which are a mechanism to adapt data types to procedural
languages. See <xref linkend="sql-createtransform"/> for more information.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_transform</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>trftype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the data type this transform is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>trflang</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-language"><structname>pg_language</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the language this transform is for
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>trffromsql</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the function to use when converting the data type for input
to the procedural language (e.g., function parameters). Zero is stored
if the default behavior should be used.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>trftosql</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the function to use when converting output from the
procedural language (e.g., return values) to the data type. Zero is
stored if the default behavior should be used.
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-trigger">
<title><structname>pg_trigger</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-trigger">
<primary>pg_trigger</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_trigger</structname> stores triggers on tables
and views.
See <xref linkend="sql-createtrigger"/>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
for more information.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_trigger</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The table this trigger is on
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgparentid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-trigger"><structname>pg_trigger</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Parent trigger that this trigger is cloned from (this happens when
partitions are created or attached to a partitioned table);
zero if not a clone
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Trigger name (must be unique among triggers of same table)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgfoid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The function to be called
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgtype</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Bit mask identifying trigger firing conditions
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgenabled</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Controls in which <xref linkend="guc-session-replication-role"/> modes
2007-03-22 16:46:56 +01:00
the trigger fires.
<literal>O</literal> = trigger fires in <quote>origin</quote> and <quote>local</quote> modes,
<literal>D</literal> = trigger is disabled,
<literal>R</literal> = trigger fires in <quote>replica</quote> mode,
<literal>A</literal> = trigger fires always.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgisinternal</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if trigger is internally generated (usually, to enforce
the constraint identified by <structfield>tgconstraint</structfield>)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgconstrrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The table referenced by a referential integrity constraint
(zero if trigger is not for a referential integrity constraint)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgconstrindid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The index supporting a unique, primary key, referential integrity,
or exclusion constraint
(zero if trigger is not for one of these types of constraint)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgconstraint</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-constraint"><structname>pg_constraint</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The <link linkend="catalog-pg-constraint"><structname>pg_constraint</structname></link> entry associated with the trigger
(zero if trigger is not for a constraint)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgdeferrable</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if constraint trigger is deferrable
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tginitdeferred</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if constraint trigger is initially deferred
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgnargs</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
Number of argument strings passed to trigger function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgattr</structfield> <type>int2vector</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link>.<structfield>attnum</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Column numbers, if trigger is column-specific; otherwise an
empty array
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgargs</structfield> <type>bytea</type>
</para>
<para>
Argument strings to pass to trigger, each NULL-terminated
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgqual</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
Expression tree (in <function>nodeToString()</function>
representation) for the trigger's <literal>WHEN</literal> condition, or null
if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgoldtable</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>REFERENCING</literal> clause name for <literal>OLD TABLE</literal>,
or null if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tgnewtable</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
<literal>REFERENCING</literal> clause name for <literal>NEW TABLE</literal>,
or null if none
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
Currently, column-specific triggering is supported only for
<literal>UPDATE</literal> events, and so <structfield>tgattr</structfield> is relevant
only for that event type. <structfield>tgtype</structfield> might
contain bits for other event types as well, but those are presumed
to be table-wide regardless of what is in <structfield>tgattr</structfield>.
</para>
<note>
<para>
When <structfield>tgconstraint</structfield> is nonzero,
<structfield>tgconstrrelid</structfield>, <structfield>tgconstrindid</structfield>,
<structfield>tgdeferrable</structfield>, and <structfield>tginitdeferred</structfield> are
largely redundant with the referenced <link linkend="catalog-pg-constraint"><structname>pg_constraint</structname></link> entry.
However, it is possible for a non-deferrable trigger to be associated
with a deferrable constraint: foreign key constraints can have some
deferrable and some non-deferrable triggers.
</para>
</note>
<note>
<para>
<literal>pg_class.relhastriggers</literal>
must be true if a relation has any triggers in this catalog.
</para>
</note>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-ts-config">
<title><structname>pg_ts_config</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-ts-config">
<primary>pg_ts_config</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The <structname>pg_ts_config</structname> catalog contains entries
representing text search configurations. A configuration specifies
a particular text search parser and a list of dictionaries to use
for each of the parser's output token types. The parser is shown
in the <structname>pg_ts_config</structname> entry, but the
token-to-dictionary mapping is defined by subsidiary entries in <link
linkend="catalog-pg-ts-config-map"><structname>pg_ts_config_map</structname></link>.
</para>
<para>
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname>'s text search features are
described at length in <xref linkend="textsearch"/>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_ts_config</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>cfgname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Text search configuration name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>cfgnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this configuration
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>cfgowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the configuration
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>cfgparser</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-parser"><structname>pg_ts_parser</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the text search parser for this configuration
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-ts-config-map">
<title><structname>pg_ts_config_map</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-ts-config-map">
<primary>pg_ts_config_map</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The <structname>pg_ts_config_map</structname> catalog contains entries
showing which text search dictionaries should be consulted, and in
what order, for each output token type of each text search configuration's
parser.
</para>
<para>
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname>'s text search features are
described at length in <xref linkend="textsearch"/>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_ts_config_map</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>mapcfg</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-config"><structname>pg_ts_config</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the <link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-config"><structname>pg_ts_config</structname></link> entry owning this map entry
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>maptokentype</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
A token type emitted by the configuration's parser
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>mapseqno</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Order in which to consult this entry (lower
<structfield>mapseqno</structfield>s first)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>mapdict</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-dict"><structname>pg_ts_dict</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the text search dictionary to consult
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-ts-dict">
<title><structname>pg_ts_dict</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-ts-dict">
<primary>pg_ts_dict</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The <structname>pg_ts_dict</structname> catalog contains entries
defining text search dictionaries. A dictionary depends on a text
search template, which specifies all the implementation functions
needed; the dictionary itself provides values for the user-settable
parameters supported by the template. This division of labor allows
dictionaries to be created by unprivileged users. The parameters
are specified by a text string <structfield>dictinitoption</structfield>,
whose format and meaning vary depending on the template.
</para>
<para>
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname>'s text search features are
described at length in <xref linkend="textsearch"/>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_ts_dict</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>dictname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Text search dictionary name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>dictnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this dictionary
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>dictowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the dictionary
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>dicttemplate</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-ts-template"><structname>pg_ts_template</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the text search template for this dictionary
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>dictinitoption</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
Initialization option string for the template
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-ts-parser">
<title><structname>pg_ts_parser</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-ts-parser">
<primary>pg_ts_parser</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The <structname>pg_ts_parser</structname> catalog contains entries
defining text search parsers. A parser is responsible for splitting
input text into lexemes and assigning a token type to each lexeme.
Since a parser must be implemented by C-language-level functions,
creation of new parsers is restricted to database superusers.
</para>
<para>
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname>'s text search features are
described at length in <xref linkend="textsearch"/>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_ts_parser</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prsname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Text search parser name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prsnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this parser
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prsstart</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the parser's startup function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prstoken</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the parser's next-token function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prsend</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the parser's shutdown function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prsheadline</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the parser's headline function (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>prslextype</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the parser's lextype function
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-ts-template">
<title><structname>pg_ts_template</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-ts-template">
<primary>pg_ts_template</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The <structname>pg_ts_template</structname> catalog contains entries
defining text search templates. A template is the implementation
skeleton for a class of text search dictionaries.
Since a template must be implemented by C-language-level functions,
creation of new templates is restricted to database superusers.
</para>
<para>
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname>'s text search features are
described at length in <xref linkend="textsearch"/>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_ts_template</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tmplname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Text search template name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tmplnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this template
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tmplinit</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the template's initialization function (zero if none)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>tmpllexize</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the template's lexize function
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-type">
<title><structname>pg_type</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-type">
<primary>pg_type</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
The catalog <structname>pg_type</structname> stores information about data
types. Base types and enum types (scalar types) are created with
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
<link linkend="sql-createtype"><command>CREATE TYPE</command></link>, and
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
domains with
Improve <xref> vs. <command> formatting in the documentation SQL commands are generally marked up as <command>, except when a link to a reference page is used using <xref>. But the latter doesn't create monospace markup, so this looks strange especially when a paragraph contains a mix of links and non-links. We considered putting <command> in the <refentrytitle> on the target side, but that creates some formatting side effects elsewhere. Generally, it seems safer to solve this on the link source side. We can't put the <xref> inside the <command>; the DTD doesn't allow this. DocBook 5 would allow the <command> to have the linkend attribute itself, but we are not there yet. So to solve this for now, convert the <xref>s to <link> plus <command>. This gives the correct look and also gives some more flexibility what we can put into the link text (e.g., subcommands or other clauses). In the future, these could then be converted to DocBook 5 style. I haven't converted absolutely all xrefs to SQL command reference pages, only those where we care about the appearance of the link text or where it was otherwise appropriate to make the appearance match a bit better. Also in some cases, the links where repetitive, so in those cases the links where just removed and replaced by a plain <command>. In cases where we just want the link and don't specifically care about the generated link text (typically phrased "for further information see <xref ...>") the xref is kept. Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org> Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/87o8pco34z.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2020-10-03 16:16:51 +02:00
<link linkend="sql-createdomain"><command>CREATE DOMAIN</command></link>.
A composite type is automatically created for each table in the database, to
2002-03-20 20:45:13 +01:00
represent the row structure of the table. It is also possible to create
2005-01-06 00:42:03 +01:00
composite types with <command>CREATE TYPE AS</command>.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_type</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typname</structfield> <type>name</type>
</para>
<para>
Data type name
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typnamespace</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-namespace"><structname>pg_namespace</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the namespace that contains this type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typowner</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Owner of the type
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typlen</structfield> <type>int2</type>
</para>
<para>
For a fixed-size type, <structfield>typlen</structfield> is the number
of bytes in the internal representation of the type. But for a
variable-length type, <structfield>typlen</structfield> is negative.
-1 indicates a <quote>varlena</quote> type (one that has a length word),
-2 indicates a null-terminated C string.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typbyval</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>typbyval</structfield> determines whether internal
routines pass a value of this type by value or by reference.
<structfield>typbyval</structfield> had better be false if
<structfield>typlen</structfield> is not 1, 2, or 4 (or 8 on machines
where Datum is 8 bytes).
Variable-length types are always passed by reference. Note that
<structfield>typbyval</structfield> can be false even if the
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
length would allow pass-by-value.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typtype</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>typtype</structfield> is
<literal>b</literal> for a base type,
<literal>c</literal> for a composite type (e.g., a table's row type),
<literal>d</literal> for a domain,
<literal>e</literal> for an enum type,
2020-12-20 05:20:33 +01:00
<literal>p</literal> for a pseudo-type,
<literal>r</literal> for a range type, or
<literal>m</literal> for a multirange type.
See also <structfield>typrelid</structfield> and
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
<structfield>typbasetype</structfield>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typcategory</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>typcategory</structfield> is an arbitrary classification
of data types that is used by the parser to determine which implicit
casts should be <quote>preferred</quote>.
See <xref linkend="catalog-typcategory-table"/>.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typispreferred</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if the type is a preferred cast target within its
<structfield>typcategory</structfield>
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typisdefined</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
True if the type is defined, false if this is a placeholder
entry for a not-yet-defined type. When
<structfield>typisdefined</structfield> is false, nothing
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
except the type name, namespace, and OID can be relied on.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typdelim</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
Character that separates two values of this type when parsing
array input. Note that the delimiter is associated with the array
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
element data type, not the array data type.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typrelid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If this is a composite type (see
<structfield>typtype</structfield>), then this column points to
the <link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link> entry that defines the
corresponding table. (For a free-standing composite type, the
<link linkend="catalog-pg-class"><structname>pg_class</structname></link> entry doesn't really represent
a table, but it is needed anyway for the type's
<link linkend="catalog-pg-attribute"><structname>pg_attribute</structname></link> entries to link to.)
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
Zero for non-composite types.
</para></entry>
</row>
Support subscripting of arbitrary types, not only arrays. This patch generalizes the subscripting infrastructure so that any data type can be subscripted, if it provides a handler function to define what that means. Traditional variable-length (varlena) arrays all use array_subscript_handler(), while the existing fixed-length types that support subscripting use raw_array_subscript_handler(). It's expected that other types that want to use subscripting notation will define their own handlers. (This patch provides no such new features, though; it only lays the foundation for them.) To do this, move the parser's semantic processing of subscripts (including coercion to whatever data type is required) into a method callback supplied by the handler. On the execution side, replace the ExecEvalSubscriptingRef* layer of functions with direct calls to callback-supplied execution routines. (Thus, essentially no new run-time overhead should be caused by this patch. Indeed, there is room to remove some overhead by supplying specialized execution routines. This patch does a little bit in that line, but more could be done.) Additional work is required here and there to remove formerly hard-wired assumptions about the result type, collation, etc of a SubscriptingRef expression node; and to remove assumptions that the subscript values must be integers. One useful side-effect of this is that we now have a less squishy mechanism for identifying whether a data type is a "true" array: instead of wiring in weird rules about typlen, we can look to see if pg_type.typsubscript == F_ARRAY_SUBSCRIPT_HANDLER. For this to be bulletproof, we have to forbid user-defined types from using that handler directly; but there seems no good reason for them to do so. This patch also removes assumptions that the number of subscripts is limited to MAXDIM (6), or indeed has any hard-wired limit. That limit still applies to types handled by array_subscript_handler or raw_array_subscript_handler, but to discourage other dependencies on this constant, I've moved it from c.h to utils/array.h. Dmitry Dolgov, reviewed at various times by Tom Lane, Arthur Zakirov, Peter Eisentraut, Pavel Stehule Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+q6zcVDuGBv=M0FqBYX8DPebS3F_0KQ6OVFobGJPM507_SZ_w@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+q6zcVovR+XY4mfk-7oNk-rF91gH0PebnNfuUjuuDsyHjOcVA@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-09 18:40:37 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typsubscript</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Subscripting handler function's OID, or zero if this type doesn't
support subscripting. Types that are <quote>true</quote> array
types have <structfield>typsubscript</structfield>
= <function>array_subscript_handler</function>, but other types may
have other handler functions to implement specialized subscripting
behavior.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typelem</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If <structfield>typelem</structfield> is not zero then it
Support subscripting of arbitrary types, not only arrays. This patch generalizes the subscripting infrastructure so that any data type can be subscripted, if it provides a handler function to define what that means. Traditional variable-length (varlena) arrays all use array_subscript_handler(), while the existing fixed-length types that support subscripting use raw_array_subscript_handler(). It's expected that other types that want to use subscripting notation will define their own handlers. (This patch provides no such new features, though; it only lays the foundation for them.) To do this, move the parser's semantic processing of subscripts (including coercion to whatever data type is required) into a method callback supplied by the handler. On the execution side, replace the ExecEvalSubscriptingRef* layer of functions with direct calls to callback-supplied execution routines. (Thus, essentially no new run-time overhead should be caused by this patch. Indeed, there is room to remove some overhead by supplying specialized execution routines. This patch does a little bit in that line, but more could be done.) Additional work is required here and there to remove formerly hard-wired assumptions about the result type, collation, etc of a SubscriptingRef expression node; and to remove assumptions that the subscript values must be integers. One useful side-effect of this is that we now have a less squishy mechanism for identifying whether a data type is a "true" array: instead of wiring in weird rules about typlen, we can look to see if pg_type.typsubscript == F_ARRAY_SUBSCRIPT_HANDLER. For this to be bulletproof, we have to forbid user-defined types from using that handler directly; but there seems no good reason for them to do so. This patch also removes assumptions that the number of subscripts is limited to MAXDIM (6), or indeed has any hard-wired limit. That limit still applies to types handled by array_subscript_handler or raw_array_subscript_handler, but to discourage other dependencies on this constant, I've moved it from c.h to utils/array.h. Dmitry Dolgov, reviewed at various times by Tom Lane, Arthur Zakirov, Peter Eisentraut, Pavel Stehule Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+q6zcVDuGBv=M0FqBYX8DPebS3F_0KQ6OVFobGJPM507_SZ_w@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+q6zcVovR+XY4mfk-7oNk-rF91gH0PebnNfuUjuuDsyHjOcVA@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-09 18:40:37 +01:00
identifies another row in <structname>pg_type</structname>,
defining the type yielded by subscripting. This should be zero
if <structfield>typsubscript</structfield> is zero. However, it can
be zero when <structfield>typsubscript</structfield> isn't zero, if the
Support subscripting of arbitrary types, not only arrays. This patch generalizes the subscripting infrastructure so that any data type can be subscripted, if it provides a handler function to define what that means. Traditional variable-length (varlena) arrays all use array_subscript_handler(), while the existing fixed-length types that support subscripting use raw_array_subscript_handler(). It's expected that other types that want to use subscripting notation will define their own handlers. (This patch provides no such new features, though; it only lays the foundation for them.) To do this, move the parser's semantic processing of subscripts (including coercion to whatever data type is required) into a method callback supplied by the handler. On the execution side, replace the ExecEvalSubscriptingRef* layer of functions with direct calls to callback-supplied execution routines. (Thus, essentially no new run-time overhead should be caused by this patch. Indeed, there is room to remove some overhead by supplying specialized execution routines. This patch does a little bit in that line, but more could be done.) Additional work is required here and there to remove formerly hard-wired assumptions about the result type, collation, etc of a SubscriptingRef expression node; and to remove assumptions that the subscript values must be integers. One useful side-effect of this is that we now have a less squishy mechanism for identifying whether a data type is a "true" array: instead of wiring in weird rules about typlen, we can look to see if pg_type.typsubscript == F_ARRAY_SUBSCRIPT_HANDLER. For this to be bulletproof, we have to forbid user-defined types from using that handler directly; but there seems no good reason for them to do so. This patch also removes assumptions that the number of subscripts is limited to MAXDIM (6), or indeed has any hard-wired limit. That limit still applies to types handled by array_subscript_handler or raw_array_subscript_handler, but to discourage other dependencies on this constant, I've moved it from c.h to utils/array.h. Dmitry Dolgov, reviewed at various times by Tom Lane, Arthur Zakirov, Peter Eisentraut, Pavel Stehule Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+q6zcVDuGBv=M0FqBYX8DPebS3F_0KQ6OVFobGJPM507_SZ_w@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+q6zcVovR+XY4mfk-7oNk-rF91gH0PebnNfuUjuuDsyHjOcVA@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-09 18:40:37 +01:00
handler doesn't need <structfield>typelem</structfield> to
determine the subscripting result type.
Note that a <structfield>typelem</structfield> dependency is
considered to imply physical containment of the element type in
this type; so DDL changes on the element type might be restricted
by the presence of this type.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typarray</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If <structfield>typarray</structfield> is not zero then it
identifies another row in <structname>pg_type</structname>, which
is the <quote>true</quote> array type having this type as element
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typinput</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Input conversion function (text format)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typoutput</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Output conversion function (text format)
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typreceive</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Input conversion function (binary format), or zero if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typsend</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Output conversion function (binary format), or zero if none
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typmodin</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Type modifier input function, or zero if type does not support modifiers
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typmodout</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Type modifier output function, or zero to use the standard format
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typanalyze</structfield> <type>regproc</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-proc"><structname>pg_proc</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
Custom <xref linkend="sql-analyze"/> function,
or zero to use the standard function
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typalign</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>typalign</structfield> is the alignment required
when storing a value of this type. It applies to storage on
disk as well as most representations of the value inside
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname>.
When multiple values are stored consecutively, such
as in the representation of a complete row on disk, padding is
inserted before a datum of this type so that it begins on the
specified boundary. The alignment reference is the beginning
of the first datum in the sequence.
Possible values are:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><literal>c</literal> = <type>char</type> alignment, i.e., no alignment needed.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para><literal>s</literal> = <type>short</type> alignment (2 bytes on most machines).</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para><literal>i</literal> = <type>int</type> alignment (4 bytes on most machines).</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para><literal>d</literal> = <type>double</type> alignment (8 bytes on many machines, but by no means all).</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typstorage</structfield> <type>char</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>typstorage</structfield> tells for varlena
types (those with <structfield>typlen</structfield> = -1) if
the type is prepared for toasting and what the default strategy
for attributes of this type should be.
Possible values are:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
<literal>p</literal> (plain): Values must always be stored plain
(non-varlena types always use this value).
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
<literal>e</literal> (external): Values can be stored in a
secondary <quote>TOAST</quote> relation (if relation has one, see
<literal>pg_class.reltoastrelid</literal>).
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
<literal>m</literal> (main): Values can be compressed and stored
inline.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
<literal>x</literal> (extended): Values can be compressed and/or
moved to a secondary relation.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<literal>x</literal> is the usual choice for toast-able types.
Note that <literal>m</literal> values can also be moved out to
secondary storage, but only as a last resort (<literal>e</literal>
and <literal>x</literal> values are moved first).
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typnotnull</structfield> <type>bool</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>typnotnull</structfield> represents a not-null
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
constraint on a type. Used for domains only.
</para></entry>
</row>
2002-03-20 20:45:13 +01:00
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typbasetype</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-type"><structname>pg_type</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
If this is a domain (see <structfield>typtype</structfield>), then
<structfield>typbasetype</structfield> identifies the type that this
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
one is based on. Zero if this type is not a domain.
2002-03-20 20:45:13 +01:00
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typtypmod</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
Domains use <structfield>typtypmod</structfield> to record the <literal>typmod</literal>
to be applied to their base type (-1 if base type does not use a
<literal>typmod</literal>). -1 if this type is not a domain.
</para></entry>
2002-03-20 20:45:13 +01:00
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typndims</structfield> <type>int4</type>
</para>
<para>
2002-03-20 20:45:13 +01:00
<structfield>typndims</structfield> is the number of array dimensions
for a domain over an array (that is, <structfield>typbasetype</structfield> is
Improve handling of domains over arrays. This patch eliminates various bizarre behaviors caused by sloppy thinking about the difference between a domain type and its underlying array type. In particular, the operation of updating one element of such an array has to be considered as yielding a value of the underlying array type, *not* a value of the domain, because there's no assurance that the domain's CHECK constraints are still satisfied. If we're intending to store the result back into a domain column, we have to re-cast to the domain type so that constraints are re-checked. For similar reasons, such a domain can't be blindly matched to an ANYARRAY polymorphic parameter, because the polymorphic function is likely to apply array-ish operations that could invalidate the domain constraints. For the moment, we just forbid such matching. We might later wish to insert an automatic downcast to the underlying array type, but such a change should also change matching of domains to ANYELEMENT for consistency. To ensure that all such logic is rechecked, this patch removes the original hack of setting a domain's pg_type.typelem field to match its base type; the typelem will always be zero instead. In those places where it's really okay to look through the domain type with no other logic changes, use the newly added get_base_element_type function in place of get_element_type. catversion bumped due to change in pg_type contents. Per bug #5717 from Richard Huxton and subsequent discussion.
2010-10-21 22:07:17 +02:00
an array type).
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
Zero for types other than domains over array types.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typcollation</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-collation"><structname>pg_collation</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
<structfield>typcollation</structfield> specifies the collation
of the type. If the type does not support collations, this will
be zero. A base type that supports collations will have a nonzero
value here, typically <symbol>DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID</symbol>.
A domain over a collatable type can have a collation OID different
from its base type's, if one was specified for the domain.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typdefaultbin</structfield> <type>pg_node_tree</type>
</para>
<para>
If <structfield>typdefaultbin</structfield> is not null, it is the
<function>nodeToString()</function>
representation of a default expression for the type. This is
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
only used for domains.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typdefault</structfield> <type>text</type>
</para>
<para>
<structfield>typdefault</structfield> is null if the type has no associated
default value. If <structfield>typdefaultbin</structfield> is not null,
<structfield>typdefault</structfield> must contain a human-readable version of the
default expression represented by <structfield>typdefaultbin</structfield>. If
<structfield>typdefaultbin</structfield> is null and <structfield>typdefault</structfield> is
not, then <structfield>typdefault</structfield> is the external representation of
the type's default value, which can be fed to the type's input
2010-08-17 06:37:21 +02:00
converter to produce a constant.
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>typacl</structfield> <type>aclitem[]</type>
</para>
<para>
Access privileges; see <xref linkend="ddl-priv"/> for details
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<note>
<para>
For fixed-width types used in system tables, it is critical that the size
and alignment defined in <structname>pg_type</structname>
agree with the way that the compiler will lay out the column in
a structure representing a table row.
</para>
</note>
<para>
<xref linkend="catalog-typcategory-table"/> lists the system-defined values
of <structfield>typcategory</structfield>. Any future additions to this list will
also be upper-case ASCII letters. All other ASCII characters are reserved
for user-defined categories.
</para>
<table id="catalog-typcategory-table">
<title><structfield>typcategory</structfield> Codes</title>
<tgroup cols="2">
<thead>
<row>
<entry>Code</entry>
<entry>Category</entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry><literal>A</literal></entry>
<entry>Array types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>B</literal></entry>
<entry>Boolean types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>C</literal></entry>
<entry>Composite types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>D</literal></entry>
<entry>Date/time types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>E</literal></entry>
<entry>Enum types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>G</literal></entry>
<entry>Geometric types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>I</literal></entry>
<entry>Network address types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>N</literal></entry>
<entry>Numeric types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>P</literal></entry>
<entry>Pseudo-types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>R</literal></entry>
<entry>Range types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>S</literal></entry>
<entry>String types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>T</literal></entry>
<entry>Timespan types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>U</literal></entry>
<entry>User-defined types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>V</literal></entry>
<entry>Bit-string types</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>X</literal></entry>
<entry><type>unknown</type> type</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><literal>Z</literal></entry>
<entry>Internal-use types</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-user-mapping">
<title><structname>pg_user_mapping</structname></title>
<indexterm zone="catalog-pg-user-mapping">
<primary>pg_user_mapping</primary>
</indexterm>
<para>
The catalog <structname>pg_user_mapping</structname> stores
the mappings from local user to remote. Access to this catalog is
restricted from normal users, use the view
<link linkend="view-pg-user-mappings"><structname>pg_user_mappings</structname></link>
instead.
</para>
<table>
<title><structname>pg_user_mapping</structname> Columns</title>
<tgroup cols="1">
<thead>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
Column Type
</para>
<para>
Description
</para></entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>oid</structfield> <type>oid</type>
</para>
<para>
Row identifier
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>umuser</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-authid"><structname>pg_authid</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
OID of the local role being mapped, or zero if the user mapping is public
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>umserver</structfield> <type>oid</type>
(references <link linkend="catalog-pg-foreign-server"><structname>pg_foreign_server</structname></link>.<structfield>oid</structfield>)
</para>
<para>
The OID of the foreign server that contains this mapping
</para></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry role="catalog_table_entry"><para role="column_definition">
<structfield>umoptions</structfield> <type>text[]</type>
</para>
<para>
User mapping specific options, as <quote>keyword=value</quote> strings
</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</sect1>
</chapter>